]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
x86: Support Intel IBT with IBT property and IBT-enable PLT
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
2571583a 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
3aa2d05a
NC
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
709prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
710@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
387dd777
DP
831@kindex -plugin @var{name}
832@item -plugin @var{name}
833Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837wish.
838
839Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845just copy in the newest one.
846
26278bb8
UD
847@kindex --push-state
848@cindex push state governing input file handling
849@item --push-state
850The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864something as follows:
865
866@smallexample
867-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868@end smallexample
869
870@kindex --pop-state
871@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 872@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
873Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874flags governing input file handling.
875
a712da20
NC
876@kindex -q
877@kindex --emit-relocs
878@cindex retain relocations in final executable
879@item -q
880@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 881Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
882Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884in larger executables.
885
dbab7a7b
NC
886This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
4f471f39
RS
888@kindex --force-dynamic
889@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890@item --force-dynamic
891Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892to VxWorks targets.
893
252b5132
RH
894@cindex partial link
895@cindex relocatable output
896@kindex -r
1049f94e 897@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 898@item -r
1049f94e 899@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 900Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 901turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
902linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 905@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
906If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
62bf86b4
HPN
910When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914with input files in other formats at all.
915
252b5132
RH
916This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918@kindex -R @var{file}
919@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920@cindex symbol-only input
921@item -R @var{filename}
922@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
ff5dcc92 928For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 929followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 930the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
931
932@kindex -s
933@kindex --strip-all
934@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 935@item -s
252b5132
RH
936@itemx --strip-all
937Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939@kindex -S
940@kindex --strip-debug
941@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 942@item -S
252b5132
RH
943@itemx --strip-debug
944Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
a70f34c0
NC
946@kindex --strip-discarded
947@kindex --no-strip-discarded
948@item --strip-discarded
949@itemx --no-strip-discarded
950Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951Enabled by default.
952
252b5132
RH
953@kindex -t
954@kindex --trace
955@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 956@item -t
252b5132 957@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 958Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
959
960@kindex -T @var{script}
961@kindex --script=@var{script}
962@cindex script files
963@item -T @var{scriptfile}
964@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 966@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 967@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
968output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971options accumulate.
252b5132 972
14be8564
L
973@kindex -dT @var{script}
974@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975@cindex script files
976@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987@samp{gcc}).
988
252b5132
RH
989@kindex -u @var{symbol}
990@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991@cindex undefined symbol
992@item -u @var{symbol}
993@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
0a618243
AB
1000If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003instead.
1004
1005@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006@cindex symbols, require defined
1007@cindex defined symbol
1008@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
252b5132
RH
1016@kindex -Ur
1017@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1019For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1021turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1022@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026@samp{-r} for the others.
1027
c005eb9e
AB
1028@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029@cindex orphan sections
1030@cindex sections, orphan
1031@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037@table @code
1038@item place
1039Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1041@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1042
1043@item discard
1044All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047@item warn
1048The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049issue a warning.
1050
1051@item error
1052The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053@end table
1054
1055The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
577a0623
AM
1057@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1066
252b5132
RH
1067@kindex -v
1068@kindex -V
1069@kindex --version
1070@cindex version
1071@item -v
1072@itemx --version
1073@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1074Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1075lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077@kindex -x
1078@kindex --discard-all
1079@cindex deleting local symbols
1080@item -x
1081@itemx --discard-all
1082Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084@kindex -X
1085@kindex --discard-locals
1086@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1087@item -X
252b5132 1088@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1089Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1092
1093@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095@cindex symbol tracing
1096@item -y @var{symbol}
1097@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105@kindex -Y @var{path}
1106@item -Y @var{path}
1107Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1112The recognized keywords are:
1113@table @samp
1114
1115@item combreloc
1116Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117lookup caching possible.
1118
b8871f35
L
1119@item common
1120Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121link.
1122
cd6d6c15 1123@item defs
560e09e9 1124Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1125shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1126
6aa29e7b
JJ
1127@item execstack
1128Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
b039ef04
L
1130@item global
1131This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
cd6d6c15
NC
1135@item initfirst
1136This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141objects.
1142
1143@item interpose
1144Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145but the primary executable.
1146
5fa222e4
AM
1147@item lazy
1148When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151Lazy binding is the default.
1152
cd6d6c15
NC
1153@item loadfltr
1154Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155runtime.
1156
1157@item muldefs
1158Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160@item nocombreloc
1161Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
b8871f35
L
1163@item nocommon
1164Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165link.
1166
cd6d6c15 1167@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1168Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1170
1171@item nodefaultlib
1172Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175@item nodelete
1176Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178@item nodlopen
1179Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181@item nodump
1182Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
6aa29e7b
JJ
1184@item noexecstack
1185Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
8dfef1bd
L
1187@item text
1188Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190@item notext
1191Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193@item textoff
1194Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
6aa29e7b
JJ
1196@item norelro
1197Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
cd6d6c15
NC
1199@item now
1200When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204first called.
1205
1206@item origin
1207Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
6aa29e7b
JJ
1209@item relro
1210Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
24718e3b
L
1212@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
04c3a755
NS
1218@item stack-size=@var{value}
1219Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
d258b828
IZ
1223@item bndplt
1224Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
889c2a67
L
1226@item noextern-protected-data
1227Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1231module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1232i386 and x86-64.
1233
954b63d4
AM
1234@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1235Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1236if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1237by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1238option.
1239
aec6b87e 1240@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
954b63d4
AM
1241Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1242object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1243@option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1244are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1245make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
aec6b87e 1246
4c10bbaa
L
1247@item noreloc-overflow
1248Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
caa65211 1252@item call-nop=prefix-addr
caa65211
L
1253@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1254@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1255@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1256Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1257to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1258@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
caa65211
L
1259@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1260@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1261@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1262Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1263
ee2fdd6f
L
1264@item ibtplt
1265Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1266Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1267
1268@item IBT
1269Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1270to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1271Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1272
cd6d6c15
NC
1273@end table
1274
ece2d90e 1275Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1276
1277@kindex -(
1278@cindex groups of archives
1279@item -( @var{archives} -)
1280@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1281The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1282either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1283
1284The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1285references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1286the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1287archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1288object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1289would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1290they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1291resolved.
1292
1293Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1294it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1295more archives.
1296
69da35b5
NC
1297@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1298@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1299@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1300@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1301Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1302recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1303and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1304the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1305behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1306so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1307restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1308
4a43e768
AM
1309@kindex --as-needed
1310@kindex --no-as-needed
1311@item --as-needed
1312@itemx --no-as-needed
1313This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1314on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1315the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1316on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1317needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1318emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1319non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1320the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1321non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1322Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1323the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1324needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1325from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1326
e56f61be
L
1327@kindex --add-needed
1328@kindex --no-add-needed
1329@item --add-needed
1330@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1331These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1332their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1333options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1334and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1335
252b5132
RH
1336@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1337@item -assert @var{keyword}
1338This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1339
1340@kindex -Bdynamic
1341@kindex -dy
1342@kindex -call_shared
1343@item -Bdynamic
1344@itemx -dy
1345@itemx -call_shared
1346Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1347for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1348default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1349for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1350multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1351@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1352
a1ab1d2a
UD
1353@kindex -Bgroup
1354@item -Bgroup
1355Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1356section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1357object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1358@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1359only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1360
252b5132
RH
1361@kindex -Bstatic
1362@kindex -dn
1363@kindex -non_shared
1364@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1365@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1366@itemx -dn
1367@itemx -non_shared
1368@itemx -static
1369Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1370platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1371variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1372may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1373library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1374option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1375option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1376shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1377references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1378libraries.
252b5132
RH
1379
1380@kindex -Bsymbolic
1381@item -Bsymbolic
1382When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1383definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1384for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1385within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1386@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1387executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1388the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1389support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1390
40b36307
L
1391@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1392@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1393When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1394symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1395This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1396when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1397to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1398This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1399libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1400
55255dae
L
1401@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1402@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1403Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1404typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1405global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1406within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1407to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1408in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1409which support shared libraries.
1410
1411The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1412scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1413
40b36307
L
1414@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1415@item --dynamic-list-data
1416Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1417
1418@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1419@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1420Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1421is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1422
0b8a70d9
L
1423@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1424@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1425Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1426
252b5132
RH
1427@kindex --check-sections
1428@kindex --no-check-sections
1429@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1430@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1431Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1432been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1433perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1434suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1435allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1436restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1437Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1438force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1439option.
252b5132 1440
ddbb8a31
NC
1441@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1442@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1443@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1444@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1445This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1446by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1447command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1448output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1449input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1450specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1451follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1452behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1453
1454This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1455libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1456mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1457their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1458required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1459the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1460dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1461symbols.
1462
252b5132
RH
1463@cindex cross reference table
1464@kindex --cref
1465@item --cref
1466Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1467generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1468Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1469
1470The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1471easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1472sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1473symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1474definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1475where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1476symbol are listed.
252b5132 1477
4818e05f
AM
1478@cindex common allocation
1479@kindex --no-define-common
1480@item --no-define-common
1481This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1482The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1483@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1484
1485The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1486the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1487of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1488forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1489Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1490from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1491This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1492and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1493duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1494paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1495
7bdf4127
AB
1496@cindex group allocation in linker script
1497@cindex section groups
1498@cindex COMDAT
1499@kindex --force-group-allocation
1500@item --force-group-allocation
1501This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1502normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1503default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1504change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1505command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1506effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1507
252b5132 1508@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1509@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1510@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1511Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1512address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1513times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1514limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1515context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1516symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1517constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1518using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1519@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1520equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1521
1522@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1523@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1524@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1525@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1526@itemx --no-demangle
1527These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1528and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1529present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1530underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1531mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1532different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1533to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1534demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1535is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1536
1537@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1538@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1539@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1540@item -I@var{file}
1541@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1542Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1543generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1544linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1545doing.
1546
9b8b325a
RF
1547@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1548@item --no-dynamic-linker
1549When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1550linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1551executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1552entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1553
a70f34c0
NC
1554@kindex --embedded-relocs
1555@item --embedded-relocs
1556This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1557that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1558is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1559targets.
1560
7ce691ae 1561@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1562@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1563@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1564@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1565Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1566with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1567
252b5132
RH
1568@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1569@item --force-exe-suffix
1570Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1571
1572If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1573@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1574the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1575option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1576Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1577it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1578
1579@kindex --gc-sections
1580@kindex --no-gc-sections
1581@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1582@item --gc-sections
1583@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1584Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1585targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1586performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1587@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1588collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1589implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1590
d5465ba2
AM
1591@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1592examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1593symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1594command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1595referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1596libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1597referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1598the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1599relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1600
ac69cbc6 1601This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1602@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1603specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1604a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1605
c17d87de
NC
1606@kindex --print-gc-sections
1607@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1608@cindex garbage collection
1609@item --print-gc-sections
1610@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1611List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1612printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1613collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1614default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1615be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1616line.
1617
22185505 1618@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1619@cindex garbage collection
1620@item --gc-keep-exported
1621When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1622collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1623default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1624executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1625collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1626Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1627it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1628ELF format targets.
1629
30824704
RM
1630@kindex --print-output-format
1631@cindex output format
1632@item --print-output-format
1633Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1634other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1635in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1636
3604cb1f
TG
1637@kindex --print-memory-usage
1638@cindex memory usage
1639@item --print-memory-usage
1640Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1641the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1642quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1643headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1644parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1645
1646@smallexample
1647Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1648 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1649 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1650@end smallexample
1651
252b5132
RH
1652@cindex help
1653@cindex usage
1654@kindex --help
1655@item --help
1656Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1657
ea20a7da
CC
1658@kindex --target-help
1659@item --target-help
1660Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1661
2509a395
SL
1662@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1663@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1664Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1665@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1666
1667@cindex memory usage
1668@kindex --no-keep-memory
1669@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1670@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1671symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1672instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1673necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1674while linking a large executable.
1675
1676@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1677@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1678@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1679@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1680Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1681is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1682The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1683behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1684libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1685
aa713662
L
1686@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1687@kindex -z muldefs
1688@item --allow-multiple-definition
1689@itemx -z muldefs
1690Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1691report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1692first definition will be used.
1693
b79e8c78 1694@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1695@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1696@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1697@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1698Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1699This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1700determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1701shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1702how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1703
903249d7
NC
1704The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1705referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1706an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1707a shared library.
1708
1709The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1710libraries specified at link time are that:
1711
1712@itemize @bullet
1713@item
1714A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1715that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1716resolvable at load time.
1717@item
1718There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1719symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1720
1721The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1722select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1723architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1724appropriate memset function.
1725@end itemize
b79e8c78 1726
31941635
L
1727@kindex --no-undefined-version
1728@item --no-undefined-version
1729Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1730it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1731will be issued instead.
1732
3e3b46e5
PB
1733@kindex --default-symver
1734@item --default-symver
1735Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1736exported symbols.
1737
1738@kindex --default-imported-symver
1739@item --default-imported-symver
1740Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1741imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1742
252b5132
RH
1743@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1744@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1745Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1746files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1747been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1748This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1749errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1750have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1751inappropriate.
1752
fe7929ce
AM
1753@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1754@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1755Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1756library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1757
252b5132
RH
1758@kindex --no-whole-archive
1759@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1760Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1761archive files.
1762
1763@cindex output file after errors
1764@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1765@item --noinhibit-exec
1766Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1767Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1768errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1769when it issues any error whatsoever.
1770
0a9c1c8e
CD
1771@kindex -nostdlib
1772@item -nostdlib
1773Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1774command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1775(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1776
252b5132 1777@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1778@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1779@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1780@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1781file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1782@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1783object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1784object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1785should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1786usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1787name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1788list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1789command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1790this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1791@end ifclear
1792
76359541
TP
1793@kindex --out-implib
1794@item --out-implib @var{file}
1795Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1796the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1797library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1798may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1799behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1800step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1801the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1802
36af4a4e
JJ
1803@kindex -pie
1804@kindex --pic-executable
1805@item -pie
1806@itemx --pic-executable
1807@cindex position independent executables
1808Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1809ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1810libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1811address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1812normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1813defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1814
252b5132
RH
1815@kindex -qmagic
1816@item -qmagic
1817This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1818
1819@kindex -Qy
1820@item -Qy
1821This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1822
1823@kindex --relax
1824@cindex synthesizing linker
1825@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1826@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1827@item --relax
28d5f677 1828@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1829An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1830@ifset GENERIC
1831This option is only supported on a few targets.
1832@end ifset
1833@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1834@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1835@end ifset
1836@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1837@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1838@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1839@ifset XTENSA
1840@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1841@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1842@ifset M68HC11
1843@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1844@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1845@ifset NIOSII
1846@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1847@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1848@ifset POWERPC
1849@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1850@end ifset
252b5132 1851
28d5f677
NC
1852On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1853global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1854addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1855synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1856instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1857
1858On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1859debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1860@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1861This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1862family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1863@end ifset
1864
1865@ifset GENERIC
1866On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1867but ignored.
1868@end ifset
1869
28d5f677
NC
1870On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1871@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1872
252b5132
RH
1873@cindex retaining specified symbols
1874@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1875@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1876@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1877@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1878Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1879discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1880symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1881@ifset GENERIC
1882(such as VxWorks)
1883@end ifset
1884where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1885run-time memory.
1886
1887@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1888or symbols needed for relocations.
1889
1890You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1891line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1892
1893@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1894@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1895@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1896@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1897Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1898linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1899arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1900them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1901also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1902objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1903@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1904ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1905@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1906
ff5dcc92 1907The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1908SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1909@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1910runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1911options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1912gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1913file systems.
252b5132 1914
ff5dcc92 1915For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1916followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1917the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1918@end ifset
1919
1920@ifset GENERIC
1921@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1922@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1923@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1924When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1925happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1926of the input files.
1927
1928When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1929non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1930shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1931explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1932specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1933@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1934either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1935appearing multiple times.
1936
e680a6b6
NC
1937The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1938directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1939containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1940and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
194164-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1942
1943The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1944@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1945supported.
1946
28c309a2
NC
1947This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1948that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1949is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1950runtime linker would do.
1951
252b5132 1952The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1953libraries:
252b5132
RH
1954@enumerate
1955@item
ff5dcc92 1956Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1957@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1958Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1959between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1960specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1961used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1962at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1963by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1964the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1965@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1966On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1967@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1968environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1969@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1970On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1971directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1972@item
a1b8d843 1973For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1974variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1975@item
ec4eb78a
L
1976For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1977@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1978libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1979@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1980@item
252b5132
RH
1981The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1982@item
1983For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1984exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1985@end enumerate
1986
1987If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1988warning and continue with the link.
1989@end ifset
1990
1991@kindex -shared
1992@kindex -Bshareable
1993@item -shared
1994@itemx -Bshareable
1995@cindex shared libraries
1996Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1997and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1998shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1999undefined symbols in the link.
2000
252b5132 2001@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2002@item --sort-common
2003@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2004@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2005This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2006ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2007sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2008eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2009between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2010specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2011
2509a395
SL
2012@kindex --sort-section=name
2013@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2014This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2015patterns in the linker script.
2016
2509a395
SL
2017@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2018@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2019This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2020patterns in the linker script.
2021
a70f34c0
NC
2022@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2023@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2024This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2025.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2026post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2027
252b5132 2028@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2029@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2030Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2031each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2032size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2033
2034@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2035@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2036Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2037output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2038This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2039certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2040cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2041that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2042support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2043input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2044more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2045many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2046
2047@kindex --stats
2048@item --stats
2049Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2050as execution time and memory usage.
2051
2509a395 2052@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2053@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2054Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2055configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2056that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2057
a70f34c0
NC
2058@kindex --task-link
2059@item --task-link
2060This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2061file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2062
252b5132
RH
2063@kindex --traditional-format
2064@cindex traditional format
2065@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2066For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2067the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2068use the traditional format instead.
2069
2070@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2071For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2072symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2073full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2074@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2075trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2076combine duplicate entries.
2077
2509a395
SL
2078@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2079@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2080Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2081address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2082times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2083line.
2084@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2085for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2086@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2087should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2088sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2089
2509a395
SL
2090@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2091@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2092@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2093@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2094@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2095@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2096@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2097Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2098@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2099
2509a395
SL
2100@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2101@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2102@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2103When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2104byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2105
9d5777a3
RM
2106@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2107@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2108@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2109When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2110the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2111text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2112
0d705e9f
AM
2113@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2114@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2115@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2116When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2117model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2118
560e09e9
NC
2119@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2120@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2121Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2122values for @samp{method}:
2123
2124@table @samp
2125@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2126Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2127
2128@item report-all
da8bce14 2129Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2130
2131@item ignore-in-object-files
2132Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2133ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2134
2135@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2136Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2137ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2138when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2139libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2140command line.
2141@end table
2142
2143The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2144by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2145
2146Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2147unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2148can change this to a warning.
2149
1715a13c
L
2150@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2151@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2152@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2153@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2154Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2155supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2156the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2157argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2158
2159@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2160@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2161@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2162Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2163used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2164about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2165is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2166see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2167use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2168symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2169@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2170
7ce691ae 2171@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2172@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2173@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2174@item --warn-common
2175Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2176a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2177but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2178you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2179Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2180warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2181
2182There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2183
2184@table @samp
2185@item int i = 1;
2186A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2187file.
2188
2189@item extern int i;
2190An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2191There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2192variable somewhere.
2193
2194@item int i;
2195A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2196variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2197The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2198single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2199size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2200a definition of the same variable.
2201@end table
2202
2203The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2204Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2205just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2206encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2207a common symbol.
2208
2209@enumerate
2210@item
2211Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2212definition for the symbol.
2213@smallexample
2214@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2215 overridden by definition
2216@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2217@end smallexample
2218
2219@item
2220Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2221the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2222except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2223@smallexample
2224@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2225 overriding common
2226@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2227@end smallexample
2228
2229@item
2230Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2231@smallexample
2232@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2233 of `@var{symbol}'
2234@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2235@end smallexample
2236
2237@item
2238Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2239@smallexample
2240@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2241 overridden by larger common
2242@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2243@end smallexample
2244
2245@item
2246Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2247the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2248encountered in a different order.
2249@smallexample
2250@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2251 overriding smaller common
2252@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2253@end smallexample
2254@end enumerate
2255
2256@kindex --warn-constructors
2257@item --warn-constructors
2258Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2259object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2260detect the use of global constructors.
2261
2262@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2263@item --warn-multiple-gp
2264Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2265This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2266Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2267section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2268of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2269base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2270base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2271bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2272large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2273values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2274option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2275
2276@kindex --warn-once
2277@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2278@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2279@item --warn-once
2280Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2281which refers to it.
2282
2283@kindex --warn-section-align
2284@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2285@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2286@item --warn-section-align
2287Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2288alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2289The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2290is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2291the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2292
8fdd7217
NC
2293@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2294@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2295Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2296
a0c402a5
L
2297@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2298@item --warn-alternate-em
2299Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2300
560e09e9
NC
2301@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2302@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2303If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2304@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2305This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2306
2307@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2308@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2309This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2310it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2311
252b5132
RH
2312@kindex --whole-archive
2313@cindex including an entire archive
2314@item --whole-archive
2315For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2316@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2317in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2318files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2319library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2320library. This option may be used more than once.
2321
7ec229ce 2322Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2323about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2324Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2325list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2326your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2327
2509a395
SL
2328@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2329@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2330Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2331@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2332undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2333@var{symbol}.
2334
2335This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2336wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2337wishes to call the system function, it should call
2338@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2339
2340Here is a trivial example:
2341
2342@smallexample
2343void *
cc2f008e 2344__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2345@{
cc2f008e 2346 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2347 return __real_malloc (c);
2348@}
2349@end smallexample
2350
ff5dcc92 2351If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2352all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2353instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2354call the real @code{malloc} function.
2355
2356You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2357links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2358you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2359file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2360call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2361
6aa29e7b 2362@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2363@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2364@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2365@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2366Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2367(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2368section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2369
e41b3a13
JJ
2370@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2371@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2372Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2373generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2374if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2375
6c1439be
L
2376@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2377@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2378@item --enable-new-dtags
2379@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2380This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2381systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2382@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2383and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2384If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2385created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2386those options are only available for ELF systems.
2387
2d643429 2388@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2389@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2390Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2391close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2392time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2393increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2394value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2395
fdc90cb4
JJ
2396@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2397@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2398Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2399@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2400new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2401the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2402hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2403
0ce398f1
L
2404@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2405@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2406@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2407@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2408@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2409@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2410@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2411@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2412On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2413compressed using zlib.
2414
2415@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2416sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2417DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2418instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2419also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2420sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2421
2422The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2423@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2424
2425Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2426sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2427for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2428uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2429
2430The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2431involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2432default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2433@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2434
35835446
JR
2435@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2436@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2437This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2438linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2439for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2440about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2441
4f9c04f7 2442Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24431021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2444run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2445has been used.
2446
2447The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2448enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2449
c0065db7
RM
2450@kindex --build-id
2451@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2452@item --build-id
2453@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2454Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2455or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2456unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2457@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2458@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2459@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2460the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2461string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2462@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2463is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2464
2465The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2466that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2467unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2468to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2469file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2470string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2471
2472Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2473@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2474@end table
2475
0285c67d
NC
2476@c man end
2477
36f63dca 2478@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2479
0285c67d
NC
2480@c man begin OPTIONS
2481
ff5dcc92 2482The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2483the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2484normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2485use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2486@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2487like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2488symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2489object file).
2490
2491In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2492support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2493PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2494values by either a space or an equals sign.
2495
ff5dcc92 2496@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2497
2498@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2499@item --add-stdcall-alias
2500If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2501as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2503
2504@kindex --base-file
2505@item --base-file @var{file}
2506Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2507addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2508@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2509[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2510
2511@kindex --dll
2512@item --dll
2513Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2514@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2515file.
bb10df36 2516[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2517
88183869
DK
2518@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2519@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2520@item --enable-long-section-names
2521@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2522The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2523the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2524for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2525fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2526to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2527allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2528disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2529generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2530as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2531with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2532GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2533information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2534option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2535section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2536when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2537image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2538[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2539
252b5132
RH
2540@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2541@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2542@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2543@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2544If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2545do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2546only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2547resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2548undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2549@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2550to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2551warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2552import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2553to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2554feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2555@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2556mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2557[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2558
522f09cd
KT
2559@kindex --leading-underscore
2560@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2561@item --leading-underscore
2562@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2563For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2564in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2565disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2566
252b5132
RH
2567@cindex DLLs, creating
2568@kindex --export-all-symbols
2569@item --export-all-symbols
2570If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2571be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2572otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2573explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2574attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2575option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2576@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2577@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2578exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2579re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2580such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2581@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2582@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2583Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2584not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2585extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2586(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2587These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2588@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2589@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2590@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2591@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2592[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2593
2594@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2595@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2596Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2597exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2598[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2599
2927aaca
NC
2600@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2601@item --exclude-all-symbols
2602Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2603[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2604
252b5132
RH
2605@kindex --file-alignment
2606@item --file-alignment
2607Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2608file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2609512.
bb10df36 2610[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2611
2612@cindex heap size
2613@kindex --heap
2614@item --heap @var{reserve}
2615@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2616Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2617to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2618committed.
bb10df36 2619[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2620
2621@cindex image base
2622@kindex --image-base
2623@item --image-base @var{value}
2624Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2625the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2626is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2627your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2628other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2629for dlls.
bb10df36 2630[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2631
2632@kindex --kill-at
2633@item --kill-at
2634If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2635symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2636[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2637
26d2d8a2
BF
2638@kindex --large-address-aware
2639@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2640If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2641header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2642greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2643or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2644section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2645[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2646
f69a2f97
NC
2647@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2648@item --disable-large-address-aware
2649Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2650This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2651driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2652addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2653[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2654
252b5132
RH
2655@kindex --major-image-version
2656@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2657Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2658[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2659
2660@kindex --major-os-version
2661@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2662Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2663[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2664
2665@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2666@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2667Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2668[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2669
2670@kindex --minor-image-version
2671@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2672Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2673[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2674
2675@kindex --minor-os-version
2676@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2677Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2678[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2679
2680@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2681@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2682Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2684
2685@cindex DEF files, creating
2686@cindex DLLs, creating
2687@kindex --output-def
2688@item --output-def @var{file}
2689The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2690file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2691(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2692library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2693automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2694[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2695
b044cda1 2696@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2697@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2698@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2699@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2700Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2701@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2702By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2703for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2704execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2705[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2706
2707@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2708@item --disable-auto-image-base
2709Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2710user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2711default.
bb10df36 2712[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2713
2714@cindex DLLs, linking to
2715@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2716@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2717When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2718search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2719@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2720between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2721uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2722@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2723[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2724
2725@kindex --enable-auto-import
2726@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2727Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2728DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2729building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2730'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2731to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2732specification published by Microsoft.
2733
e2a83dd0
NC
2734Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2735data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2736placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2737around a problem with consts that is described here:
2738http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2739
4d8907ac
DS
2740Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2741see this message:
0d888aac 2742
ece2d90e 2743"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2744documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2745
ece2d90e
NC
2746This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2747ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2748allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2749fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2750constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2751multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2752this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2753of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2754the warning, and exit.
2755
2756There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2757data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2758
2fa9fc65
NC
2759One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2760of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2761this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2762
c0065db7
RM
2763A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2764that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2765there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2766a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2767
2768@example
2769extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2770extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2771 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2772@end example
2773
2774or
2775
2776@example
2777extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2778extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2779 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2780@end example
2781
c0065db7 2782For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2783is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2784
2785@example
2786extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2787extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2788 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2789@end example
2790
c406afaf
NC
2791or
2792
2793@example
2794extern long long extern_ll;
2795extern_ll -->
2796 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2797@end example
2798
2fa9fc65 2799A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2800'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2801@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2802requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2803building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2804merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2805between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2806constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2807
2808Original:
2809@example
2810--foo.h
2811extern int arr[];
2812--foo.c
2813#include "foo.h"
2814void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2815 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2816@}
2817@end example
2818
2819Solution 1:
2820@example
2821--foo.h
2822extern int arr[];
2823--foo.c
2824#include "foo.h"
2825void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2826 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2827 volatile int *parr = arr;
2828 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2829@}
2830@end example
2831
2832Solution 2:
2833@example
2834--foo.h
2835/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2836#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2837 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2838#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2839#else
2840#define FOO_IMPORT
2841#endif
2842extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2843--foo.c
2844#include "foo.h"
2845void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2846 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2847@}
2848@end example
2849
c0065db7 2850A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2851library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2852for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2853functions).
bb10df36 2854[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2855
2856@kindex --disable-auto-import
2857@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2858Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2859@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2860[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2861
2fa9fc65
NC
2862@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2863@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2864If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2865that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2866a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2867environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2868[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2869
2870@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2871@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2872Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2873DLLs.
bb10df36 2874[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2875
b044cda1
CW
2876@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2877@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2878Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2879[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2880
252b5132
RH
2881@kindex --section-alignment
2882@item --section-alignment
2883Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2884addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2885[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2886
2887@cindex stack size
2888@kindex --stack
2889@item --stack @var{reserve}
2890@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2891Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2892to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2893committed.
bb10df36 2894[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2895
2896@kindex --subsystem
2897@item --subsystem @var{which}
2898@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2899@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2900Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2901legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2902@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2903the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2904@var{which}.
bb10df36 2905[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2906
2f563b51
DK
2907The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2908of the PE file header:
2909[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2910
2d5c3743
NC
2911@kindex --high-entropy-va
2912@item --high-entropy-va
2913Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2914(ASLR).
2915
2f563b51
DK
2916@kindex --dynamicbase
2917@item --dynamicbase
2918The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2919randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2920Vista for i386 PE targets.
2921
2922@kindex --forceinteg
2923@item --forceinteg
2924Code integrity checks are enforced.
2925
2926@kindex --nxcompat
2927@item --nxcompat
2928The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2929This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2930
2931@kindex --no-isolation
2932@item --no-isolation
2933Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2934
2935@kindex --no-seh
2936@item --no-seh
2937The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2938this image.
2939
2940@kindex --no-bind
2941@item --no-bind
2942Do not bind this image.
2943
2944@kindex --wdmdriver
2945@item --wdmdriver
2946The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2947
2f563b51
DK
2948@kindex --tsaware
2949@item --tsaware
2950The image is Terminal Server aware.
2951
0cb112f7
CF
2952@kindex --insert-timestamp
2953@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2954@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2955Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2956as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2957other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2958will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2959same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2960can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2961that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2962identically.
252b5132
RH
2963@end table
2964
0285c67d
NC
2965@c man end
2966
ac145307
BS
2967@ifset C6X
2968@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2969
2970@c man begin OPTIONS
2971
2972The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2973libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2974all executables use an index of 0.
2975
2976@table @gcctabopt
2977
2978@kindex --dsbt-size
2979@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2980This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2981or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2982entries.
2983
2984@kindex --dsbt-index
2985@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2986This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2987to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2988executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2989@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2990
fbd9ad90
PB
2991@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2992The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2993exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2994
ac145307
BS
2995@end table
2996
2997@c man end
2998@end ifset
2999
93fd0973
SC
3000@ifset M68HC11
3001@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3002
3003@c man begin OPTIONS
3004
3005The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3006memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3007
3008@table @gcctabopt
3009
3010@kindex --no-trampoline
3011@item --no-trampoline
3012This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3013is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3014instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3015
3016@kindex --bank-window
3017@item --bank-window @var{name}
3018This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3019the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3020The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3021paging and addresses within the memory window.
3022
3023@end table
3024
3025@c man end
3026@end ifset
3027
7fb9f789
NC
3028@ifset M68K
3029@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3030
3031@c man begin OPTIONS
3032
3033The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3034when linking for 68K targets.
3035
3036@table @gcctabopt
3037
3038@kindex --got
3039@item --got=@var{type}
3040This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3041@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3042@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3043Info entry for @file{ld}.
3044
3045@end table
3046
3047@c man end
3048@end ifset
3049
833794fc
MR
3050@ifset MIPS
3051@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3052
3053@c man begin OPTIONS
3054
3055The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3056generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3057linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3058
3059@table @gcctabopt
3060
3061@kindex --insn32
3062@item --insn32
3063@kindex --no-insn32
3064@itemx --no-insn32
3065These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3066generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3067or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
306832-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3069used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3070possible.
3071
8b10b0b3
MR
3072@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3073@item --ignore-branch-isa
3074@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3075@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3076These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3077transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3078accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3079is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3080instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3081equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3082calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3083a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3084an error.
3085
833794fc
MR
3086@end table
3087
3088@c man end
3089@end ifset
3090
252b5132
RH
3091@ifset UsesEnvVars
3092@node Environment
3093@section Environment Variables
3094
0285c67d
NC
3095@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3096
560e09e9 3097You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3098@ifclear SingleFormat
3099@code{GNUTARGET},
3100@end ifclear
3101@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3102
36f63dca 3103@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3104@kindex GNUTARGET
3105@cindex default input format
3106@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3107use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3108of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3109@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3110of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3111attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3112this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3113there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3114object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3115BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3116in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3117@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3118
3119@kindex LDEMULATION
3120@cindex default emulation
3121@cindex emulation, default
3122@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3123@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3124behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3125available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3126the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3127variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3128linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3129
3130@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3131@cindex demangling, default
3132Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3133@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3134default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3135a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3136may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3137options.
3138
0285c67d
NC
3139@c man end
3140@end ifset
3141
252b5132
RH
3142@node Scripts
3143@chapter Linker Scripts
3144
3145@cindex scripts
3146@cindex linker scripts
3147@cindex command files
3148Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3149written in the linker command language.
3150
3151The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3152the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3153the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3154more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3155direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3156described below.
3157
3158The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3159yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3160linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3161to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3162such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3163
3164You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3165line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3166default linker script.
3167
3168You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3169to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3170Linker Scripts}.
3171
3172@menu
3173* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3174* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3175* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3176* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3177* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3178* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3179* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3180* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3181* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3182* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3183* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3184@end menu
3185
3186@node Basic Script Concepts
3187@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3188@cindex linker script concepts
3189We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3190describe the linker script language.
3191
3192The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3193file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3194@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3195The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3196purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3197among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3198section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3199in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3200
3201Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3202also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3203contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3204the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3205A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3206area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3207loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3208which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3209of debugging information.
3210
3211Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3212first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3213the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3214@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3215section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3216same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3217is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3218(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3219based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3220RAM address would be the VMA.
3221
3222You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3223program with the @samp{-h} option.
3224
3225Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3226@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3227has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3228information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3229will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3230static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3231referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3232
3233You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3234program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3235option.
3236
3237@node Script Format
3238@section Linker Script Format
3239@cindex linker script format
3240Linker scripts are text files.
3241
3242You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3243either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3244symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3245generally ignored.
3246
3247Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3248If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3249otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3250double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3251file name.
3252
3253You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3254@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3255to whitespace.
3256
3257@node Simple Example
3258@section Simple Linker Script Example
3259@cindex linker script example
3260@cindex example of linker script
3261Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3262
3263The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3264@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3265memory layout of the output file.
3266
3267The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3268describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3269code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3270@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3271Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3272your input files.
3273
3274For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32750x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3276linker script which will do that:
3277@smallexample
3278SECTIONS
3279@{
3280 . = 0x10000;
3281 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3282 . = 0x8000000;
3283 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3284 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3285@}
3286@end smallexample
3287
3288You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3289followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3290descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3291
252b5132
RH
3292The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3293sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3294counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3295other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3296current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3297incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3298@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3299
3300The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3301required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3302after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3303which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3304wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3305means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3306
3307Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3308@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3309@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3310
3311The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3312the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3313at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3314output section, the value of the location counter will be
3315@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3316effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3317immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3318
3319The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3320alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3321example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3322sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3323may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3324sections.
3325
3326That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3327
3328@node Simple Commands
3329@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3330@cindex linker script simple commands
3331In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3332
3333@menu
3334* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3335* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3336@ifclear SingleFormat
3337* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3338@end ifclear
3339
4a93e180 3340* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3341* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3342@end menu
3343
3344@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3345@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3346@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3347@cindex start of execution
3348@cindex first instruction
3349@cindex entry point
3350The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3351point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3352entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3353@smallexample
3354ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3355@end smallexample
3356
3357There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3358entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3359stopping when one of them succeeds:
3360@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3361@item
252b5132 3362the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3363@item
252b5132 3364the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3365@item
3ab904c4
NC
3366the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3367targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3368check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3369@item
252b5132 3370the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3371@item
252b5132
RH
3372The address @code{0}.
3373@end itemize
3374
3375@node File Commands
36f63dca 3376@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3377@cindex linker script file commands
3378Several linker script commands deal with files.
3379
3380@table @code
3381@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3382@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3383@cindex including a linker script
3384Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3385be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3386with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
338710 levels deep.
3388
4006703d
NS
3389You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3390@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3391
252b5132
RH
3392@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3393@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3394@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3395@cindex input files in linker scripts
3396@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3397@cindex linker script input object files
3398The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3399in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3400
3401For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3402a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3403then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3404
3405In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3406script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3407
e3f2db7f
AO
3408In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3409with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3410located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3411for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3412open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3413linker will search through the archive library search path.
3414The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3415as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3416path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3417@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3418
ff5dcc92 3419If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3420name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3421@samp{-l}.
3422
3423When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3424files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3425script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3426
3427@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3428@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3429@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3430@cindex grouping input files
3431The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3432files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3433new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3434in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3435
b717d30e
JJ
3436@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3437@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3438@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3439This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3440commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3441as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3442with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3443when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3444@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3445and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3446setting afterwards.
3447
252b5132
RH
3448@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3449@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3450@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3451The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3452@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3453@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3454Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3455precedence.
3456
3457You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3458output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3459
3460@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3461@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3462@cindex library search path in linker script
3463@cindex archive search path in linker script
3464@cindex search path in linker script
3465The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3466@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3467@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3468on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3469are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3470the command line option are searched first.
3471
3472@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3473@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3474@cindex first input file
3475The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3476that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3477though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3478when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3479first file.
3480@end table
3481
3482@ifclear SingleFormat
3483@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3484@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3485A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3486
3487@table @code
3488@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3489@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3490@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3491@cindex output file format in linker script
3492The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3493output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3494exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3495(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3496line option takes precedence.
3497
3498You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3499formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3500This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3501desired endianness.
3502
3503If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3504will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3505output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3506used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3507
3508For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3509command:
3510@smallexample
3511OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3512@end smallexample
3513This says that the default format for the output file is
3514@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3515option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3516format.
3517
3518@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3519@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3520@cindex input file format in linker script
3521The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3522files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3523This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3524(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3525is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3526command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3527@end table
3528@end ifclear
3529
4a93e180
NC
3530@node REGION_ALIAS
3531@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3532@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3533@cindex region alias
3534@cindex region names
3535
3536Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3537@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3538
3539@smallexample
3540REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3541@end smallexample
3542
3543The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3544memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3545to memory regions. An example follows.
3546
3547Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3548memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3549that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3550non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3551access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3552read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3553sections:
3554
3555@itemize @bullet
3556@item
3557@code{.text} program code;
3558@item
3559@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3560@item
3561@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3562@item
3563@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3564@end itemize
3565
3566The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3567part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3568output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3569systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3570@code{C}:
3571@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3572@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3573@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3574@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3575@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3576@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3577@end multitable
3578The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3579loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3580the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3581the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3582
3583The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3584includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3585memory layout:
3586@smallexample
3587INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3588
3589SECTIONS
3590 @{
3591 .text :
3592 @{
3593 *(.text)
3594 @} > REGION_TEXT
3595 .rodata :
3596 @{
3597 *(.rodata)
3598 rodata_end = .;
3599 @} > REGION_RODATA
3600 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3601 @{
3602 data_start = .;
3603 *(.data)
3604 @} > REGION_DATA
3605 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3606 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3607 .bss :
3608 @{
3609 *(.bss)
3610 @} > REGION_BSS
3611 @}
3612@end smallexample
3613
3614Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3615regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3616variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3617@table @code
3618@item A
3619Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3620@smallexample
3621MEMORY
3622 @{
3623 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3624 @}
3625
3626REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3627REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3628REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3629REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3630@end smallexample
3631@item B
3632Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3633into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3634@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3635@smallexample
3636MEMORY
3637 @{
3638 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3639 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3640 @}
3641
3642REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3643REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3644REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3645REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3646@end smallexample
3647@item C
3648Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3649@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3650initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3651system start into the @code{RAM}.
3652@smallexample
3653MEMORY
3654 @{
3655 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3656 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3657 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3658 @}
3659
3660REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3661REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3662REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3663REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3664@end smallexample
3665@end table
3666
3667It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3668@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3669necessary:
3670@smallexample
3671#include <string.h>
3672
3673extern char data_start [];
3674extern char data_size [];
3675extern char data_load_start [];
3676
3677void copy_data(void)
3678@{
3679 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3680 @{
3681 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3682 @}
3683@}
3684@end smallexample
3685
252b5132 3686@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3687@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3688There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3689
3690@table @code
3691@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3692@kindex ASSERT
3693@cindex assertion in linker script
3694Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3695with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3696
fd1c4238
NC
3697Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3698take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3699inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3700for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3701symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3702
3703@smallexample
3704 .stack :
3705 @{
3706 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3707 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3708 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3709 @}
3710@end smallexample
3711
3712will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3713PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3714can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3715
3716@smallexample
3717 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3718 .stack :
3719 @{
3720 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3721 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3722 @}
3723@end smallexample
3724
3725will work.
3726
252b5132
RH
3727@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3728@kindex EXTERN
3729@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3730Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3731symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3732modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3733each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3734command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3735
3736@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3737@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3738@cindex common allocation in linker script
3739This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3740to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3741output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3742
4818e05f
AM
3743@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3744@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3745@cindex common allocation in linker script
3746This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3747command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3748to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3749
7bdf4127
AB
3750@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3751@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3752@cindex group allocation in linker script
3753@cindex section groups
3754@cindex COMDAT
3755This command has the same effect as the
3756@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3757@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3758and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3759specified (@samp{-r}).
3760
53d25da6
AM
3761@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3762@kindex INSERT
3763@cindex insert user script into default script
3764This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3765augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3766inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3767@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3768default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3769sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3770linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3771insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3772linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3773default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3774of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3775to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3776is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3777
3778@smallexample
3779SECTIONS
3780@{
3781 OVERLAY :
3782 @{
3783 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3784 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3785 @}
3786@}
3787INSERT AFTER .text;
3788@end smallexample
3789
252b5132
RH
3790@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3791@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3792@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3793This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3794references among certain output sections.
3795
3796In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3797using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3798will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3799errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3800a function defined in the other section.
3801
3802The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3803@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3804an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3805@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3806names.
3807
cdf96953
MF
3808@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3809@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3810@cindex cross references
3811This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3812references to one section from a list of other sections.
3813
3814The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3815output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3816a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3817there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3818must never call back.
3819
3820The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3821The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3822If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3823the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3824status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3825names, not input section names.
3826
252b5132
RH
3827@ifclear SingleFormat
3828@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3829@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3830@cindex machine architecture
3831@cindex architecture
3832Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3833of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3834architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3835the @samp{-f} option.
3836@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3837
3838@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3839@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3840This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3841@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3842in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3843@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3844@end table
3845
3846@node Assignments
3847@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3848@cindex assignment in scripts
3849@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3850@cindex variables, defining
3851You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3852the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3853
3854@menu
3855* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3856* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3857* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3858* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3859* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3860@end menu
3861
3862@node Simple Assignments
3863@subsection Simple Assignments
3864
3865You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3866
3867@table @code
3868@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3869@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3870@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3871@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3872@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3873@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3874@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3875@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3876@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3877@end table
3878
3879The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3880@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3881defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3882
3883The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3884may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3885
3886The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3887
3888Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3889
3890You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3891statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3892section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3893
3894The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3895expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3896
3897Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3898assignments may be used:
3899
3900@smallexample
3901floating_point = 0;
3902SECTIONS
3903@{
3904 .text :
3905 @{
3906 *(.text)
3907 _etext = .;
3908 @}
156e34dd 3909 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3910 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3911@}
3912@end smallexample
3913@noindent
3914In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3915zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3916the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3917defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3918upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3919
eb8476a6
MR
3920@node HIDDEN
3921@subsection HIDDEN
3922@cindex HIDDEN
3923For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3924exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3925
3926Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3927@code{HIDDEN}:
3928
3929@smallexample
3930HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3931SECTIONS
3932@{
3933 .text :
3934 @{
3935 *(.text)
3936 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3937 @}
3938 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3939 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3940@}
3941@end smallexample
3942@noindent
3943In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3944
252b5132
RH
3945@node PROVIDE
3946@subsection PROVIDE
3947@cindex PROVIDE
3948In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3949only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3950the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3951@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3952@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3953@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3954@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3955@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3956
3957Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3958@smallexample
3959SECTIONS
3960@{
3961 .text :
3962 @{
3963 *(.text)
3964 _etext = .;
3965 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3966 @}
3967@}
3968@end smallexample
3969
3970In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3971underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3972the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3973underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3974If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3975linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3976
7af8e998
L
3977@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3978@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3979@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3980Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3981hidden and won't be exported.
3982
73ae6183
NC
3983@node Source Code Reference
3984@subsection Source Code Reference
3985
3986Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3987intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3988a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3989symbol that does not have a value.
3990
3991Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3992transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3993stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3994prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3995mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3996of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3997variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3998linker script variable might be referred to as:
3999
4000@smallexample
4001 extern int foo;
4002@end smallexample
4003
4004But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4005
4006@smallexample
4007 _foo = 1000;
4008@end smallexample
4009
4010In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4011transformation has taken place.
4012
4013When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4014things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4015in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4016second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4017table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4018contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4019value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4020
4021@smallexample
4022 int foo = 1000;
4023@end smallexample
4024
10bf6894 4025creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4026holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4027number 1000 is initially stored.
4028
4029When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4030first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4031memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4032So:
4033
4034@smallexample
4035 foo = 1;
4036@end smallexample
4037
4038looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4039associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4040address. Whereas:
4041
4042@smallexample
4043 int * a = & foo;
4044@end smallexample
4045
10bf6894 4046looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4047and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4048the variable @samp{a}.
4049
4050Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4051the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4052an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4053
4054@smallexample
4055 foo = 1000;
4056@end smallexample
4057
4058creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4059the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4060address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4061linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4062access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4063
4064Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4065you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4066use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4067section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4068linker script contains these declarations:
4069
4070@smallexample
4071@group
4072 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4073 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4074 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4075@end group
4076@end smallexample
4077
4078Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4079
4080@smallexample
4081@group
4082 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4083
73ae6183
NC
4084 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4085@end group
4086@end smallexample
4087
4088Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4089Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4090arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4091
4092@smallexample
4093@group
4094 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4095
4096 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4097@end group
4098@end smallexample
4099
4100Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4101operators.
73ae6183 4102
252b5132 4103@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4104@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4105@kindex SECTIONS
4106The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4107into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4108
4109The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4110@smallexample
4111SECTIONS
4112@{
4113 @var{sections-command}
4114 @var{sections-command}
4115 @dots{}
4116@}
4117@end smallexample
4118
4119Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4120
4121@itemize @bullet
4122@item
4123an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4124@item
4125a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4126@item
4127an output section description
4128@item
4129an overlay description
4130@end itemize
4131
4132The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4133@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4134those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4135understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4136the layout of the output file.
4137
4138Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4139below.
4140
4141If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4142linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4143section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4144input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4145example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4146in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4147
4148@menu
4149* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4150* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4151* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4152* Input Section:: Input section description
4153* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4154* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4155* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4156* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4157* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4158@end menu
4159
4160@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4161@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4162The full description of an output section looks like this:
4163@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4164@group
7e7d5768 4165@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4166 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4167 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4168 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4169 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4170 @{
4171 @var{output-section-command}
4172 @var{output-section-command}
4173 @dots{}
abc9061b 4174 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4175@end group
4176@end smallexample
4177
4178Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4179
4180The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4181name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4182The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4183the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4184The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4185
4186Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4187
4188@itemize @bullet
4189@item
4190a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4191@item
4192an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4193@item
4194data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4195@item
4196a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4197@end itemize
4198
4199@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4200@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4201@cindex name, section
4202@cindex section name
4203The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4204meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4205support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4206must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4207example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4208output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4209names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4210quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4211characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4212commas must be quoted.
4213
4214The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4215Discarding}.
4216
4217@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4218@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4219@cindex address, section
4220@cindex section address
4221The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4222address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4223is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4224
4225If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4226section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4227to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4228alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4229contained within the output section.
4230
4231The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4232
4233@itemize @bullet
4234@item
4235If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4236is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4237in that region.
4238
4239@item
4240If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4241regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4242section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4243be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4244
4245@item
4246If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4247the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4248counter.
4249@end itemize
4250
4251@noindent
4252For example:
4253
252b5132
RH
4254@smallexample
4255.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4256@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4257
252b5132
RH
4258@noindent
4259and
ea5cae92 4260
252b5132
RH
4261@smallexample
4262.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4263@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4264
252b5132
RH
4265@noindent
4266are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4267@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4268counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4269counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4270input sections.
252b5132
RH
4271
4272The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4273For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4274so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4275do something like this:
4276@smallexample
4277.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4278@end smallexample
4279@noindent
4280This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4281aligned upward to the specified value.
4282
4283Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4284location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4285sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4286
4287@node Input Section
36f63dca 4288@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4289@cindex input sections
4290@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4291The most common output section command is an input section description.
4292
4293The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4294You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4295in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4296map the input files into your memory layout.
4297
4298@menu
4299* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4300* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4301* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4302* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4303* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4304@end menu
4305
4306@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4307@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4308@cindex input section basics
4309An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4310by a list of section names in parentheses.
4311
4312The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4313describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4314
4315The most common input section description is to include all input
4316sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4317include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4318@smallexample
4319*(.text)
4320@end smallexample
4321@noindent
18625d54 4322Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4323@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4324of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4325match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4326example:
252b5132 4327@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4328EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4329@end smallexample
4330@noindent
4331will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4332and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4333placed inside the section list, for example:
4334@smallexample
b4346c09 4335*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4336@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4337@noindent
4338The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4339two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4340more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4341
4342There are two ways to include more than one section:
4343@smallexample
4344*(.text .rdata)
4345*(.text) *(.rdata)
4346@end smallexample
4347@noindent
4348The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4349@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4350first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4351they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4352@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4353@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4354
8f1732fc
AB
4355When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4356is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4357immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4358@smallexample
4359*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4360@end smallexample
4361@noindent
4362will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4363@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4364from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4365exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4366could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4367@smallexample
4368*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4369@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4370@noindent
4371Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4372before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4373all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4374@smallexample
4375EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4376@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4377
252b5132
RH
4378You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4379You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4380needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4381@smallexample
4382data.o(.data)
4383@end smallexample
4384
ae17ab41
CM
4385To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4386of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4387
4388Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4389
4390@smallexample
4391@group
4392SECTIONS @{
4393 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4394 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4395@}
4396@end group
4397@end smallexample
4398
4399In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4400input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4401@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4402@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4403whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4404
967928e9
AM
4405You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4406matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4407with no whitespace around the colon.
4408
4409@table @samp
4410@item archive:file
4411matches file within archive
4412@item archive:
4413matches the whole archive
4414@item :file
4415matches file but not one in an archive
4416@end table
4417
4418Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4419wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4420single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4421@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4422within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4423also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4424other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4425from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4426command.
4427
252b5132
RH
4428If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4429the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4430commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4431@smallexample
4432data.o
4433@end smallexample
4434
967928e9
AM
4435When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4436and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4437characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4438name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4439did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4440though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4441@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4442the archive search path.
4443
4444@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4445@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4446@cindex input section wildcards
4447@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4448@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4449@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4450In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4451name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4452
4453The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4454pattern for the file name.
4455
4456The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4457
4458@table @samp
4459@item *
4460matches any number of characters
4461@item ?
4462matches any single character
4463@item [@var{chars}]
4464matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4465character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4466@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4467@item \
4468quotes the following character
4469@end table
4470
4471When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4472will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4473Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4474exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4475@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4476a @samp{/} character.
4477
4478File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4479specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4480does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4481
4482If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4483appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4484will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4485sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4486@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4487@smallexample
4488.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4489.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4490@end smallexample
4491
bcaa7b3e 4492@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4493Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4494in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4495this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4496pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4497@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4498into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4499
bcaa7b3e
L
4500@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4501@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4502difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4503descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4504Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4505reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4506
02ecc8e9
L
4507@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4508@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4509difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4510ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4511encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4512
bcaa7b3e
L
4513@cindex SORT
4514@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4515
4516When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4517can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4518
4519@enumerate
4520@item
4521@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4522It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4523sections have the same name.
4524@item
4525@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4526It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4527sections have the same alignment.
4528@item
c0065db7 4529@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4530treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4531@item
4532@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4533is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4534@item
4535All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4536@end enumerate
4537
4538When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4539section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4540takes precedence over the command line option.
4541
4542If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4543command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4544treated as nested sorting command.
4545
4546@enumerate
4547@item
4548@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4549@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4550@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4551@item
4552@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4553@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4554@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4555@end enumerate
4556
4557If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4558command line option will be ignored.
4559
eda680f8
L
4560@cindex SORT_NONE
4561@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4562section sorting option.
4563
252b5132
RH
4564If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4565@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4566precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4567
4568This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4569files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4570sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4571The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4572with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4573linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4574@smallexample
4575@group
4576SECTIONS @{
4577 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4578 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4579 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4580 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4581@}
4582@end group
4583@end smallexample
4584
4585@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4586@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4587@cindex common symbol placement
4588@cindex uninitialized data placement
4589A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4590file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4591linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4592named @samp{COMMON}.
4593
4594You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4595other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4596particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4597input files are placed in another section.
4598
4599In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4600@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4601@smallexample
4602.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4603@end smallexample
4604
4605@cindex scommon section
4606@cindex small common symbols
4607Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4608example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4609symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4610different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4611the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4612symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4613to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4614locations.
4615
4616@cindex [COMMON]
4617You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4618notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4619@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4620
4621@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4622@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4623@cindex KEEP
4624@cindex garbage collection
4625When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4626it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4627This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4628with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4629@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4630
4631@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4632@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4633The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4634to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4635start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4636@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4637follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4638@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4639@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4640All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4641files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4642
4643@smallexample
4644@group
4645SECTIONS @{
4646 outputa 0x10000 :
4647 @{
4648 all.o
4649 foo.o (.input1)
4650 @}
36f63dca
NC
4651@end group
4652@group
252b5132
RH
4653 outputb :
4654 @{
4655 foo.o (.input2)
4656 foo1.o (.input1)
4657 @}
36f63dca
NC
4658@end group
4659@group
252b5132
RH
4660 outputc :
4661 @{
4662 *(.input1)
4663 *(.input2)
4664 @}
4665@}
4666@end group
a1ab1d2a 4667@end smallexample
252b5132 4668
cbd0eecf
L
4669If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4670and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4671automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4672__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4673indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4674respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4675C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4676
252b5132 4677@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4678@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4679@cindex data
4680@cindex section data
4681@cindex output section data
4682@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4683@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4684@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4685@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4686@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4687You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4688@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4689an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4690parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4691value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4692counter.
4693
4694The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4695store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4696bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4697stored.
4698
4699For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4700of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4701@smallexample
4702BYTE(1)
4703LONG(addr)
4704@end smallexample
4705
4706When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4707same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4708target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4709@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4710@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4711
4712If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4713which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4714When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4715true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4716endianness of the first input object file.
4717
36f63dca 4718Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4719between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4720@smallexample
4721SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4722@end smallexample
4723whereas this will work:
4724@smallexample
4725SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4726@end smallexample
4727
252b5132
RH
4728@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4729@cindex holes, filling
4730@cindex unspecified memory
4731You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4732current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4733otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4734gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4735with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4736necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4737point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4738than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4739different parts of an output section.
4740
4741This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4742value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4743@smallexample
563e308f 4744FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4745@end smallexample
4746
4747The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4748section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4749part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4750entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4751precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4752expression.
252b5132
RH
4753
4754@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4755@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4756There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4757commands.
4758
4759@table @code
4760@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4761@cindex input filename symbols
4762@cindex filename symbols
4763@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4764The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4765The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4766file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4767the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4768
4769This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4770normally used for any other object file format.
4771
4772@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4773@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4774@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4775@item CONSTRUCTORS
4776When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4777unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4778destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4779arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4780automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4781For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4782linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4783@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4784ignored for other object file formats.
4785
4786The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4787constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4788Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4789the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4790first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4791of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4792compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4793formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4794@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4795the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4796destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4797@code{exit}.
4798
4799For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4800arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4801addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4802and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4803linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4804runtime code expects to see.
4805
4806@smallexample
4807 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4808 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4809 *(.ctors)
4810 LONG(0)
4811 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4812 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4813 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4814 *(.dtors)
4815 LONG(0)
4816 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4817@end smallexample
4818
4819If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4820which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4821are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4822are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4823command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4824@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4825@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4826@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4827
4828Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4829and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4830need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4831scripts.
4832
4833@end table
4834
4835@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4836@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4837@cindex discarding sections
4838@cindex sections, discarding
4839@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4840The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4841This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4842may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4843@smallexample
49c13adb 4844.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4845@end smallexample
4846@noindent
4847will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4848@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4849sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4850space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4851too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4852space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4853@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4854@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4855This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4856
a0976ea4 4857The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4858on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4859symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4860the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4861section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4862
4863@cindex /DISCARD/
4864The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4865input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4866section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4867
4868@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4869@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4870@cindex output section attributes
4871We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4872like this:
0c71d759 4873
252b5132 4874@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4875@group
7e7d5768 4876@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4877 [AT(@var{lma})]
4878 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4879 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4880 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4881 @{
4882 @var{output-section-command}
4883 @var{output-section-command}
4884 @dots{}
562d3460 4885 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4886@end group
4887@end smallexample
0c71d759 4888
252b5132
RH
4889We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4890@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4891remaining section attributes.
4892
a1ab1d2a 4893@menu
252b5132
RH
4894* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4895* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4896* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4897* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4898* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4899* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4900* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4901* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4902@end menu
4903
4904@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4905@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4906Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4907parentheses. The following types are defined:
4908
4909@table @code
4910@item NOLOAD
4911The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4912loaded into memory when the program is run.
4913@item DSECT
4914@itemx COPY
4915@itemx INFO
4916@itemx OVERLAY
4917These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4918rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4919marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4920section when the program is run.
4921@end table
4922
4923@kindex NOLOAD
4924@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4925@cindex loading, preventing
4926The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4927the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4928the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4929@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4930need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4931@smallexample
4932@group
4933SECTIONS @{
4934 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4935 @dots{}
4936@}
4937@end group
4938@end smallexample
4939
4940@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4941@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4942@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4943@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4944@cindex load address
4945@cindex section load address
4946Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4947@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4948@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4949specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4950address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4951
ea5cae92
NC
4952The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4953specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4954takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4955load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4956region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4957
4958If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4959section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4960load address:
4961
4962@itemize @bullet
4963@item
4964If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4965the LMA address as well.
4966
4967@item
4968If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4969
4970@item
4971Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4972with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4973section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4974VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4975the last section in the located region.
4976
4977@item
4978If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4979that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4980
4981@item
4982If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4983section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4984@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4985
4986@cindex ROM initialized data
4987@cindex initialized data in ROM
4988This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4989example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4990called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4991@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4992even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4993uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4994defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4995counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4996
4997@smallexample
4998@group
4999SECTIONS
5000 @{
5001 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5002 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5003 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5004 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5005 .bss 0x3000 :
5006 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5007@}
5008@end group
5009@end smallexample
5010
5011The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5012this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5013the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5014how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5015script.
5016
5017@smallexample
5018@group
5019extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5020char *src = &_etext;
5021char *dst = &_data;
5022
ea5cae92
NC
5023/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5024while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5025 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5026
ea5cae92 5027/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5028for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5029 *dst = 0;
5030@end group
5031@end smallexample
5032
bbf115d3
L
5033@node Forced Output Alignment
5034@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5035@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5036@cindex forcing output section alignment
5037@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5038You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5039alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5040intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5041
7e7d5768
AM
5042@node Forced Input Alignment
5043@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5044@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5045@cindex forcing input section alignment
5046@cindex input section alignment
5047You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5048SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5049sections, whether larger or smaller.
5050
0c71d759
NC
5051@node Output Section Constraint
5052@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5053@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5054@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5055@cindex constraints on output sections
5056You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5057of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5058read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5059@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5060
252b5132 5061@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5062@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5063@kindex >@var{region}
5064@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5065@cindex memory regions and sections
5066You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5067using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5068
5069Here is a simple example:
5070@smallexample
5071@group
5072MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5073SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5074@end group
5075@end smallexample
5076
5077@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5078@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5079@kindex :@var{phdr}
5080@cindex section, assigning to program header
5081@cindex program headers and sections
5082You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5083using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5084one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5085assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5086@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5087linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5088
5089Here is a simple example:
5090@smallexample
5091@group
5092PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5093SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5094@end group
5095@end smallexample
5096
5097@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5098@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5099@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5100@cindex section fill pattern
5101@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5102You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5103@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5104(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5105within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5106alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5107necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5108of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5109an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5110fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5111other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5112pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5113expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5114
5115You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5116output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5117
5118Here is a simple example:
5119@smallexample
5120@group
563e308f 5121SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5122@end group
5123@end smallexample
5124
5125@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5126@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5127@kindex OVERLAY
5128@cindex overlays
5129An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5130are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5131the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5132copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5133required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5134can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5135than another.
5136
5137Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5138@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5139output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5140command is as follows:
5141@smallexample
5142@group
5143OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5144 @{
5145 @var{secname1}
5146 @{
5147 @var{output-section-command}
5148 @var{output-section-command}
5149 @dots{}
5150 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5151 @var{secname2}
5152 @{
5153 @var{output-section-command}
5154 @var{output-section-command}
5155 @dots{}
5156 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5157 @dots{}
abc9061b 5158 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5159@end group
5160@end smallexample
5161
5162Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5163section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5164section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5165those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5166except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5167sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5168
abc9061b
CC
5169The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5170the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5171
252b5132
RH
5172The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5173addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5174memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5175whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5176and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5177and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5178
56dd11f0
NC
5179If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5180references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5181the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5182sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5183@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5184
5185For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5186provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5187defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5188@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5189the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5190within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5191symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5192
5193At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5194the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5195
5196Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5197@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5198@smallexample
5199@group
5200 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5201 @{
5202 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5203 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5204 @}
5205@end group
5206@end smallexample
5207@noindent
5208This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5209address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5210@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5211following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5212@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5213@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5214
5215C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5216like the following.
5217
5218@smallexample
5219@group
5220 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5221 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5222 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5223@end group
5224@end smallexample
5225
5226Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5227everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5228example could have been written identically as follows.
5229
5230@smallexample
5231@group
5232 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5233 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5234 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5235 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5236 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5237 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5238 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5239@end group
5240@end smallexample
5241
5242@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5243@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5244@kindex MEMORY
5245@cindex memory regions
5246@cindex regions of memory
5247@cindex allocating memory
5248@cindex discontinuous memory
5249The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5250memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5251
5252The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5253memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5254may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5255can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5256set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5257regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5258around to fit into the available regions.
5259
127fcdff
AB
5260A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5261however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5262specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5263@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5264@smallexample
5265@group
a1ab1d2a 5266MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5267 @{
5268 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5269 @dots{}
5270 @}
5271@end group
5272@end smallexample
5273
5274The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5275region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5276Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5277with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5278must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5279add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5280command.
252b5132
RH
5281
5282@cindex memory region attributes
5283The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5284whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5285not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5286@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5287section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5288the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5289them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5290
5291The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5292@table @samp
5293@item R
5294Read-only section
5295@item W
5296Read/write section
5297@item X
5298Executable section
5299@item A
5300Allocatable section
5301@item I
5302Initialized section
5303@item L
5304Same as @samp{I}
5305@item !
c09e9a8c 5306Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5307@end table
5308
5309If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5310@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5311attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5312in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5313attributes.
5314
5315@kindex ORIGIN =
5316@kindex o =
5317@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5318The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5319the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5320cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5321abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5322@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5323
5324@kindex LENGTH =
5325@kindex len =
5326@kindex l =
5327The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5328region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5329be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5330@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5331
5332In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5333available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5334and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5335linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5336is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5337or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5338explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5339region.
5340
5341@smallexample
5342@group
a1ab1d2a 5343MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5344 @{
5345 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5346 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5347 @}
5348@end group
5349@end smallexample
5350
5351Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5352specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5353@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5354a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5355output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5356was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5357the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5358output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5359region, the linker will issue an error message.
5360
3ec57632 5361It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5362expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5363@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5364
5365@smallexample
5366@group
c0065db7 5367 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5368@end group
5369@end smallexample
5370
252b5132
RH
5371@node PHDRS
5372@section PHDRS Command
5373@kindex PHDRS
5374@cindex program headers
5375@cindex ELF program headers
5376@cindex program segments
5377@cindex segments, ELF
5378The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5379@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5380loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5381program with the @samp{-p} option.
5382
5383When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5384reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5385program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5386This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5387interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5388
5389The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5390in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5391precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5392the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5393not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5394
5395The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5396generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5397ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5398
5399This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5400@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5401
5402@smallexample
5403@group
5404PHDRS
5405@{
5406 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5407 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5408@}
5409@end group
5410@end smallexample
5411
5412The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5413of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5414header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5415with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5416must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5417is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5418
5419Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5420system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5421specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5422sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5423attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5424Section Phdr}.
5425
5426It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5427merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5428repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5429contain the section.
5430
5431If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5432then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5433not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5434convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5435placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5436default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5437segment at all.
5438
5439@kindex FILEHDR
5440@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5441You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5442the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5443The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5444file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5445include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5446segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5447these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5448
5449The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5450value of the keyword.
5451
5452@table @asis
5453@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5454Indicates an unused program header.
5455
5456@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5457Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5458the file.
5459
5460@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5461Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5462
5463@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5464Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5465found.
5466
5467@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5468Indicates a segment holding note information.
5469
5470@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5471A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5472ABI.
5473
5474@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5475Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5476
1a9ccd70
NC
5477@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5478Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5479
252b5132
RH
5480@item @var{expression}
5481An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5482be used for types not defined above.
5483@end table
5484
5485You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5486in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5487@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5488Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5489output section attribute.
5490
5491The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5492which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5493explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5494an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5495header.
5496
5497Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5498headers used on a native ELF system.
5499
5500@example
5501@group
5502PHDRS
5503@{
5504 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5505 interp PT_INTERP ;
5506 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5507 data PT_LOAD ;
5508 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5509@}
5510
5511SECTIONS
5512@{
5513 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5514 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5515 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5516 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5517 @dots{}
5518 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5519 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5520 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5521 @dots{}
5522@}
5523@end group
5524@end example
5525
5526@node VERSION
5527@section VERSION Command
5528@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5529@cindex symbol versions
5530@cindex version script
5531@cindex versions of symbols
5532The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5533only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5534symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5535a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5536shared library.
5537
5538You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5539you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5540also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5541
5542The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5543@smallexample
5544VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5545@end smallexample
5546
5547The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5548Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5549version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5550version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5551version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5552scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5553library.
5554
5555The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5556examples.
5557
5558@smallexample
5559VERS_1.1 @{
5560 global:
5561 foo1;
5562 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5563 old*;
5564 original*;
5565 new*;
252b5132
RH
5566@};
5567
5568VERS_1.2 @{
5569 foo2;
5570@} VERS_1.1;
5571
5572VERS_2.0 @{
5573 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5574 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5575 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5576 "f(int, double)";
5577 @};
252b5132
RH
5578@} VERS_1.2;
5579@end smallexample
5580
5581This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5582version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5583The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5584a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5585of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5586symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5587is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5588in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5589However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5590name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5591
5592Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5593depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5594to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5595
5596Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5597depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5598and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5599
5600When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5601specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5602unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5603unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5604somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5605wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5606wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5607set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5608ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5609
5610The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5611they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5612could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5613However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5614
0f6bf451 5615Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5616in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5617symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5618won't.
5619
5620@smallexample
7c9c73be 5621@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5622@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5623
252b5132
RH
5624When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5625symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5626requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5627shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5628loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5629linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5630application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5631way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5632all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5633search for each symbol reference.
5634
5635The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5636doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5637that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5638functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5639the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5640required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5641that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5642versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5643the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5644
5645There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5646first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5647source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5648script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5649maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5650@smallexample
5651__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5652@end smallexample
5653@noindent
5654in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5655be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5656The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5657@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5658takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5659
5660The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5661function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5662an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5663version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5664linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5665
5666To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5667source file. Here is an example:
5668
5669@smallexample
5670__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5671__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5672__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5673__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5674@end smallexample
5675
5676In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5677unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5678example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5679@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5680
5681When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5682some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5683this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5684@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5685declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5686you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5687
5688If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5689within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5690(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5691specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5692
cb840a31
L
5693You can also specify the language in the version script:
5694
5695@smallexample
5696VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5697@end smallexample
5698
c0065db7 5699The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5700The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5701demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5702patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5703@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5704
86043bbb
MM
5705Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5706described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5707or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5708the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5709whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5710cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5711might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5712should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5713expect when you upgrade.
5714
252b5132
RH
5715@node Expressions
5716@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5717@cindex expressions
5718@cindex arithmetic
5719The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5720that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5721expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5722host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5723
5724You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5725
5726The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5727expressions.
5728
5729@menu
5730* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5731* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5732* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5733* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5734* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5735* Operators:: Operators
5736* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5737* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5738* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5739@end menu
5740
5741@node Constants
5742@subsection Constants
5743@cindex integer notation
5744@cindex constants in linker scripts
5745All constants are integers.
5746
5747As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5748octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5749hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5750@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5751@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5752value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5753
5754@cindex scaled integers
5755@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5756@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5757@cindex suffixes for integers
5758@cindex integer suffixes
5759In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5760constant by
5761@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5762@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5763@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5764@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5765@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5766@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5767@tex
5768${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5769@end tex
5770@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5771respectively. For example, the following
5772all refer to the same quantity:
5773
252b5132 5774@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5775_fourk_1 = 4K;
5776_fourk_2 = 4096;
5777_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5778_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5779@end smallexample
5780
8a308ae8
NC
5781Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5782conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5783
0c71d759
NC
5784@node Symbolic Constants
5785@subsection Symbolic Constants
5786@cindex symbolic constants
5787@kindex CONSTANT
5788It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5789the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5790
5791@table @code
5792@item MAXPAGESIZE
5793@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5794The target's maximum page size.
5795
5796@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5797@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5798The target's default page size.
5799@end table
5800
5801So for example:
5802
5803@smallexample
9d5777a3 5804 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5805@end smallexample
5806
5807will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5808supported by the target.
5809
252b5132
RH
5810@node Symbols
5811@subsection Symbol Names
5812@cindex symbol names
5813@cindex names
5814@cindex quoted symbol names
5815@kindex "
5816Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5817and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5818Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5819specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5820keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5821@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5822"SECTION" = 9;
5823"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5824@end smallexample
5825
5826Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5827to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5828whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5829
ecca9871
L
5830@node Orphan Sections
5831@subsection Orphan Sections
5832@cindex orphan
5833Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5834are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5835script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5836output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5837in which to place the orphaned input section.
5838
5839If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5840an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5841placed at the end of that output section.
5842
5843If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5844sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5845name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5846orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5847one new output section.
5848
5849If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5850then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5851in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5852linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5853attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5854sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5855support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5856
c005eb9e
AB
5857The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5858(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5859output sections an orphan is placed in.
5860
252b5132
RH
5861@node Location Counter
5862@subsection The Location Counter
5863@kindex .
5864@cindex dot
5865@cindex location counter
5866@cindex current output location
5867The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5868current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5869location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5870within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5871anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5872
5873@cindex holes
5874Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5875moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5876location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5877and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5878doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5879
5880@smallexample
5881SECTIONS
5882@{
5883 output :
5884 @{
5885 file1(.text)
5886 . = . + 1000;
5887 file2(.text)
5888 . += 1000;
5889 file3(.text)
563e308f 5890 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5891@}
5892@end smallexample
5893@noindent
5894In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5895located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5896followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5897@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5898@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5899specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5900
5c6bbab8
NC
5901@cindex dot inside sections
5902Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5903current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5904statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5905absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5906however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5907not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5908
5909@smallexample
5910SECTIONS
5911@{
5912 . = 0x100
5913 .text: @{
5914 *(.text)
5915 . = 0x200
5916 @}
5917 . = 0x500
5918 .data: @{
5919 *(.data)
5920 . += 0x600
5921 @}
5922@}
5923@end smallexample
5924
5925The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5926and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5927the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5928much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5929move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5930and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5931the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5932the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5933
b5666f2f
AM
5934@cindex dot outside sections
5935Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5936output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5937needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5938
5939@smallexample
5940SECTIONS
5941@{
5942 start_of_text = . ;
5943 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5944 end_of_text = . ;
5945
5946 start_of_data = . ;
5947 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5948 end_of_data = . ;
5949@}
5950@end smallexample
5951
5952If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5953not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5954between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5955should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5956blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5957the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5958sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5959statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5960special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5961place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5962as follows:
5963
5964@smallexample
5965SECTIONS
5966@{
5967 start_of_text = . ;
5968 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5969 end_of_text = . ;
5970
5971 start_of_data = . ;
5972 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5973 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5974 end_of_data = . ;
5975@}
5976@end smallexample
5977
5978This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5979@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5980placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5981assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5982a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5983section. So you could write:
5984
5985@smallexample
5986SECTIONS
5987@{
5988 start_of_text = . ;
5989 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5990 end_of_text = . ;
5991
5992 . = . ;
5993 start_of_data = . ;
5994 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5995 end_of_data = . ;
5996@}
5997@end smallexample
5998
5999Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6000@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6001
252b5132
RH
6002@need 2000
6003@node Operators
6004@subsection Operators
6005@cindex operators for arithmetic
6006@cindex arithmetic operators
6007@cindex precedence in expressions
6008The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6009the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6010@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6011@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6012@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6013@smallexample
6014precedence associativity Operators Notes
6015(highest)
60161 left ! - ~ (1)
60172 left * / %
60183 left + -
60194 left >> <<
60205 left == != > < <= >=
60216 left &
60227 left |
60238 left &&
60249 left ||
602510 right ? :
602611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6027(lowest)
6028@end smallexample
6029Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6030(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6031(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6032@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6033@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6034@tex
6035\vskip \baselineskip
6036%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6037\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6038\hrule
6039\halign
6040{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6041height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6042&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6043height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6044\noalign{\hrule}
6045height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6046&highest&&&&&\cr
6047% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6048&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6049&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6050&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6051&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6052&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6053&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6054&7&&left&&|&\cr
6055&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6056&9&&left&&||&\cr
6057&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6058&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6059&lowest&&&&&\cr
6060height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6061\hrule}
6062@end tex
6063@iftex
6064{
6065@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6066@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6067@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6068}
6069@end iftex
6070@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6071
6072@node Evaluation
6073@subsection Evaluation
6074@cindex lazy evaluation
6075@cindex expression evaluation order
6076The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6077an expression when absolutely necessary.
6078
6079The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6080address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6081regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6082as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6083
6084However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6085until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6086other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6087for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6088
6089The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6090assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6091allocation.
6092
6093Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6094@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6095
6096If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6097available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6098following
6099@smallexample
6100@group
6101SECTIONS
6102 @{
a1ab1d2a 6103 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6104 @{ *(.text) @}
6105 @}
6106@end group
6107@end smallexample
6108@noindent
6109will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6110address}.
6111
6112@node Expression Section
6113@subsection The Section of an Expression
6114@cindex expression sections
6115@cindex absolute expressions
6116@cindex relative expressions
6117@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6118@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6119@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6120Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6121relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6122using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6123value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6124symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6125operations.
6126
abf4be64
AM
6127Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6128section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6129address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6130@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6131functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6132One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6133(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6134differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6135versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6136section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6137Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6138absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6139given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6140everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6141
6142In the following simple example,
252b5132 6143
7542af2a
AM
6144@smallexample
6145@group
6146SECTIONS
6147 @{
6148 . = 0x100;
6149 __executable_start = 0x100;
6150 .data :
6151 @{
6152 . = 0x10;
6153 __data_start = 0x10;
6154 *(.data)
6155 @}
6156 @dots{}
6157 @}
6158@end group
6159@end smallexample
252b5132 6160
7542af2a
AM
6161both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6162address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6163@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6164section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6165
5c3049d2
AM
6166For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6167addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6168
6169@itemize @bullet
6170@item
c05f749e
AM
6171Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6172operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6173absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6174@item
7542af2a
AM
6175Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6176relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6177and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6178@item
c05f749e
AM
6179Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6180in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6181address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6182before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6183@end itemize
6184
6185The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6186
6187@itemize @bullet
6188@item
6189An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6190@item
6191The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6192@item
9bc8bb33 6193The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6194relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6195(after above conversions) is also a number when
6196@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6197but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6198@item
6199The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6200relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6201section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6202@item
6203The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6204conversions) is an absolute address.
6205@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6206
6207You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6208to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6209create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6210section @samp{.data}:
6211@smallexample
6212SECTIONS
6213 @{
6214 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6215 @}
6216@end smallexample
6217@noindent
6218If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6219@samp{.data} section.
6220
7542af2a
AM
6221Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6222particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6223
252b5132
RH
6224@node Builtin Functions
6225@subsection Builtin Functions
6226@cindex functions in expressions
6227The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6228use in linker script expressions.
6229
6230@table @code
6231@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6232@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6233@cindex expression, absolute
6234Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6235of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6236value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6237normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6238
6239@item ADDR(@var{section})
6240@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6241@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6242Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6243script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6244the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6245@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6246@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6247the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6248@smallexample
6249@group
6250SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6251 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6252 @{
252b5132
RH
6253 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6254 @dots{}
6255 @}
6256 .output :
6257 @{
6258 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6259 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6260 @}
6261@dots{} @}
6262@end group
6263@end smallexample
6264
876f4090
NS
6265@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6266@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6267@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6268@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6269@cindex round up location counter
6270@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6271@cindex round up expression
6272@cindex align expression
6273Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6274to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6275doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6276arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6277expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6278equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6279
6280Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6281next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6282variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6283input sections:
252b5132
RH
6284@smallexample
6285@group
6286SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6287 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6288 *(.data)
6289 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6290 @}
6291@dots{} @}
6292@end group
6293@end smallexample
6294@noindent
6295The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6296a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6297a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6298of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6299
6300The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6301
362c1d1a
NS
6302@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6303@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6304@cindex section alignment
6305Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6306been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6307evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6308the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6309value in that section.
6310@smallexample
6311@group
6312SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6313 .output @{
6314 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6315 @dots{}
6316 @}
6317@dots{} @}
6318@end group
6319@end smallexample
6320
252b5132
RH
6321@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6322@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6323This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6324scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6325section.
6326
2d20f7bf
JJ
6327@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6328@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6329This is equivalent to either
6330@smallexample
6331(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6332@end smallexample
6333or
6334@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6335(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6336 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6337@end smallexample
6338@noindent
6339depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6340for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6341@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6342If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6343memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6344bytes in the on-disk file.
6345
6346This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6347any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6348@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6349be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6350working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6351
6352@noindent
6353Example:
6354@smallexample
6355 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6356@end smallexample
6357
6358@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6359@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6360This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6361evaluation purposes.
6362
6363@smallexample
6364 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6365@end smallexample
6366
a4f5ad88
JJ
6367@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6368@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6369This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6370@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6371When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6372does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6373@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6374boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6375it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6376@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6377padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6378section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6379
6380@smallexample
6381 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6382@end smallexample
6383
252b5132
RH
6384@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6385@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6386@cindex symbol defaults
6387Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6388defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6389return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6390default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6391shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6392the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6393existed, its value is preserved:
6394
6395@smallexample
6396@group
6397SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6398 .text : @{
6399 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6400 @dots{}
6401 @}
6402 @dots{}
6403@}
6404@end group
6405@end smallexample
6406
3ec57632
NC
6407@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6408@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6409Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6410
252b5132
RH
6411@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6412@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6413@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6414Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6415Section LMA}).
6416
2e53f7d6
NC
6417@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6418@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6419Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6420@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6421
252b5132
RH
6422@kindex MAX
6423@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6424Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6425
6426@kindex MIN
6427@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6428Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6429
6430@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6431@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6432@cindex unallocated address, next
6433Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6434This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6435use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6436output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6437
3ec57632
NC
6438@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6439@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6440Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6441
ba916c8a
MM
6442@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6443@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6444Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6445value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6446@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6447will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6448can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6449``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6450name.
6451
252b5132
RH
6452@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6453@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6454@cindex section size
6455Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6456been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6457evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6458@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6459@smallexample
6460@group
6461SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6462 .output @{
6463 .start = . ;
6464 @dots{}
6465 .end = . ;
6466 @}
6467 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6468 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6469@dots{} @}
6470@end group
6471@end smallexample
6472
6473@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6474@itemx sizeof_headers
6475@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6476@cindex header size
6477Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6478information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6479this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6480choose, to facilitate paging.
6481
6482@cindex not enough room for program headers
6483@cindex program headers, not enough room
6484When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6485@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6486number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6487addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6488additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6489room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6490the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6491script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6492you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6493command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6494@end table
6495
6496@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6497@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6498@cindex implicit linker scripts
6499If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6500an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6501linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6502linker will report an error.
6503
6504An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6505
6506Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6507assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6508commands.
6509
6510Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6511at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6512read. This can affect archive searching.
6513
6514@ifset GENERIC
6515@node Machine Dependent
6516@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6517
6518@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6519@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6520sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6521functionality are not listed.
6522
6523@menu
36f63dca
NC
6524@ifset H8300
6525* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6526@end ifset
6527@ifset I960
6528* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6529@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6530@ifset M68HC11
6531* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6532@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6533@ifset ARM
6534* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6535@end ifset
6536@ifset HPPA
6537* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6538@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6539@ifset M68K
6540* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6541@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6542@ifset MIPS
6543* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6544@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6545@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6546* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6547@end ifset
2469cfa2 6548@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6549* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6550@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6551@ifset NDS32
6552* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6553@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6554@ifset NIOSII
6555* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6556@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6557@ifset POWERPC
6558* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6559@end ifset
6560@ifset POWERPC64
6561* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6562@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6563@ifset SPU
6564* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6565@end ifset
74459f0e 6566@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6567* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6568@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6569@ifset WIN32
6570* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6571@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6572@ifset XTENSA
6573* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6574@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6575@end menu
6576@end ifset
6577
252b5132
RH
6578@ifset H8300
6579@ifclear GENERIC
6580@raisesections
6581@end ifclear
6582
6583@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6584@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6585
6586@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6587For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6588you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6589
6590@table @emph
6591@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6592@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6593@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6594targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6595program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6596respectively.
6597
6598@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6599@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6600@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6601@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6602sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6603page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6604(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6605@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6606top page of memory).
1502569c 6607
81f5558e
NC
6608@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6609indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6610displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6611the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6612@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6613whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6614range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6615
1502569c 6616@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6617@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6618biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6619which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6620page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6621(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6622@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6623the top page of memory).
6624
6625@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6626@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
662732 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6628changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6629(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6630@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6631the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6632@end table
6633
6634@ifclear GENERIC
6635@lowersections
6636@end ifclear
6637@end ifset
6638
36f63dca 6639@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6640@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6641@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6642@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6643@node Renesas
6644@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6645
c2dcd04e
NC
6646@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6647H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6648options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6649@end ifset
6650@end ifclear
6651
6652@ifset I960
6653@ifclear GENERIC
6654@raisesections
6655@end ifclear
6656
6657@node i960
6658@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6659
6660@cindex i960 support
6661
6662You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6663specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6664family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6665incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6666linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6667libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6668search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6669
6670For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6671well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6672paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6673the names
6674
6675@smallexample
6676@group
6677try
6678libtry.a
6679tryca
6680libtryca.a
6681@end group
6682@end smallexample
6683
6684@noindent
6685The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6686two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6687
6688You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6689the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6690use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6691specifies a library.
6692
6693@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6694@cindex relaxing on i960
6695@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6696you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6697@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6698them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6699instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6700instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6701target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6702not itself call any subroutines).
6703
6704@ifclear GENERIC
6705@lowersections
6706@end ifclear
6707@end ifset
6708
6709@ifset ARM
6710@ifclear GENERIC
6711@raisesections
6712@end ifclear
6713
93fd0973
SC
6714@ifset M68HC11
6715@ifclear GENERIC
6716@raisesections
6717@end ifclear
6718
6719@node M68HC11/68HC12
6720@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6721
6722@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6723
6724@subsection Linker Relaxation
6725
6726For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6727optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6728
6729@table @emph
6730@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6731@item relaxing address modes
6732@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6733targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6734program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6735respectively.
6736
6737@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6738transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6739page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6740
6741@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6742When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6743of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6744addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6745@code{bset} instructions.
6746
6747@end table
6748
6749@subsection Trampoline Generation
6750
6751@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6752@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6753For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6754call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6755will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6756trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6757case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6758point to the function trampoline.
6759
6760@ifclear GENERIC
6761@lowersections
6762@end ifclear
6763@end ifset
6764
36f63dca 6765@node ARM
3674e28a 6766@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6767
6768@cindex ARM interworking support
6769@kindex --support-old-code
6770For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6771between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6772been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6773line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6774libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6775option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6776given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6777which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6778the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6779non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6780
6781@cindex thumb entry point
6782@cindex entry point, thumb
6783@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6784The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6785@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6786But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6787branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6788executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6789
ce11ba6c
KT
6790@cindex PE import table prefixing
6791@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6792The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6793the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6794element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6795import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6796
e489d0ae
PB
6797@cindex BE8
6798@kindex --be8
6799The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6800executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6801objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6802option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6803little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6804
3674e28a
PB
6805@cindex TARGET1
6806@kindex --target1-rel
6807@kindex --target1-abs
6808The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6809@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6810or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6811and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6812
6813@cindex TARGET2
6814@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6815The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6816@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6817meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6818@table @samp
6819@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6820@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6821@item abs
6822@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6823@item got-rel
6824@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6825@end table
6826
319850b4
JB
6827@cindex FIX_V4BX
6828@kindex --fix-v4bx
6829The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6830specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6831interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6832also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6833
6834In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6835linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6836@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6837
6838In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6839relocations are ignored.
6840
845b51d6
PB
6841@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6842@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6843Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6844relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6845
6846@smallexample
6847TST rM, #1
6848MOVEQ PC, rM
6849BX Rn
6850@end smallexample
6851
6852This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6853and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6854condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6855
33bfe774
JB
6856@cindex USE_BLX
6857@kindex --use-blx
6858The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6859BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6860situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6861code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6862each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6863
6864This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6865specify it if you are using that target.
6866
c6dd86c6
JB
6867@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6868@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6869The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6870bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6871instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6872to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6873the support code can read the intended values.
6874
6875The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6876intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6877and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6878intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6879full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6880you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6881
6882If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6883enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6884@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6885mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6886vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6887@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6888
6889If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6890potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6891such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6892first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6893instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6894the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6895are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6896
2de70689
MGD
6897@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6898@kindex --fix-arm1176
6899@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6900The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6901in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6902are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6903unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6904
9d5777a3 6905Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6906Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6907http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6908
a504d23a
LA
6909@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6910@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6911
6912The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6913workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6914the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6915off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6916the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6917core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6918integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6919VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6920
6921The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6922necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6923
6924The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6925@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6926STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6927linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6928@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6929
6930If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6931potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6932such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6933replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6934branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6935then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6936
6937The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6938the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6939
6940The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6941they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6942there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6943occurs.
6944
6945The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6946PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6947large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6948cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6949occurs.
6950
bf21ed78
MS
6951@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6952@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6953The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6954warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6955enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6956linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6957using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6958not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6959
6960@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6961@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6962The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6963warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6964@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6965linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6966using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6967
726150b7
NC
6968@cindex PIC_VENEER
6969@kindex --pic-veneer
6970The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6971ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6972is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6973@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6974
6975@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6976@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6977The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6978code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6979perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6980placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6981controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6982The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6983duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6984group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6985code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6986where they should be placed.
6987
6988The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6989@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6990placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6991branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6992placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6993value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6994exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6995A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6996linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6997from the input sections.
6998
6999The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7000@samp{N = +1}.
7001
1a51c1a4
NC
7002Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7003only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7004otherwise.
7005
1db37fe6
YG
7006@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7007@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7008@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7009The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7010
7011The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7012
68fcca92
JW
7013@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7014@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7015@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7016The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7017
7018Please contact ARM for further details.
7019
1db37fe6
YG
7020@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7021@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7022@cindex Merging exidx entries
7023The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7024
7025@kindex --long-plt
7026@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7027The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7028which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7029entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7030
1f56df9d
JW
7031@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7032@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7033The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7034link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7035
4ba2ef8f
TP
7036@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7037All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7038Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7039@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7040veneers in memory.
7041
54ddd295
TP
7042@kindex --cmse-implib
7043@cindex Secure gateway import library
7044The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7045specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7046secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7047executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7048
0955507f
TP
7049@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7050@cindex Input import library
7051The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7052must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7053given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7054in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7055@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7056library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7057library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7058for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7059specified.
7060
36f63dca
NC
7061@ifclear GENERIC
7062@lowersections
7063@end ifclear
7064@end ifset
7065
7066@ifset HPPA
7067@ifclear GENERIC
7068@raisesections
7069@end ifclear
7070
7071@node HPPA ELF32
7072@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7073@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7074@kindex --multi-subspace
7075When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7076import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7077The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7078stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7079multiple sub-spaces.
7080
7081@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7082@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7083Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7084stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7085@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7086sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7087a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7088the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7089conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7090prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7091A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7092branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7093@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7094@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7095detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7096positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7097
7098Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7099single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7100create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7101large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7102
7103@ifclear GENERIC
7104@lowersections
7105@end ifclear
7106@end ifset
7107
7fb9f789
NC
7108@ifset M68K
7109@ifclear GENERIC
7110@raisesections
7111@end ifclear
7112
7113@node M68K
7114@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7115
7116@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7117@kindex --got=@var{type}
7118The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7119The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7120@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7121the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7122@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7123entries only at non-negative offsets.
7124@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7125entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7126support such GOTs.
7127@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7128output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7129file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7130files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7131
7132@ifclear GENERIC
7133@lowersections
7134@end ifclear
7135@end ifset
7136
833794fc
MR
7137@ifset MIPS
7138@ifclear GENERIC
7139@raisesections
7140@end ifclear
7141
7142@node MIPS
7143@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7144
7145@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7146@kindex --insn32
7147@kindex --no-insn32
7148The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7149microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7150in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7151used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7152or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7153including 16-bit ones where possible.
7154
8b10b0b3
MR
7155@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7156@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7157@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7158The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7159control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7160@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7161relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7162calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7163relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7164instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7165or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7166the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7167
833794fc
MR
7168@ifclear GENERIC
7169@lowersections
7170@end ifclear
7171@end ifset
7172
36f63dca
NC
7173@ifset MMIX
7174@ifclear GENERIC
7175@raisesections
7176@end ifclear
7177
7178@node MMIX
7179@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7180For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7181@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7182understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7183can translate between the two formats.
7184
7185There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7186Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7187registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7188equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7189@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7190global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7191this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7192symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7193
7a2de473
HPN
7194Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7195@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7196The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7197of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7198
7199Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7200are left out from an mmo file.
7201
7202@ifclear GENERIC
7203@lowersections
7204@end ifclear
7205@end ifset
7206
7207@ifset MSP430
7208@ifclear GENERIC
7209@raisesections
7210@end ifclear
7211
7212@node MSP430
7213@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7214For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7215will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7216just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7217
7218@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7219The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7220
7221@table @code
7222@item @samp{.vectors}
7223Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7224
7225@item @samp{.bootloader}
7226Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7227in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7228
7229@item @samp{.infomem}
7230Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7231this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7232
c0065db7 7233@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7234This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7235in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7236
7237@item @samp{.noinit}
7238Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7239
c0065db7 7240The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7241@end table
7242
7243@ifclear GENERIC
7244@lowersections
7245@end ifclear
7246@end ifset
7247
35c08157
KLC
7248@ifset NDS32
7249@ifclear GENERIC
7250@raisesections
7251@end ifclear
7252
7253@node NDS32
7254@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7255@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7256For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7257relaxes objects according to these options.
7258
7259@table @code
7260@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7261Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7262
7263@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7264Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7265
7266@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7267Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7268
7269@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7270Export the EX9 table after linking.
7271
7272@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7273Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7274
7275@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7276Update the existing EX9 table.
7277
7278@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7279Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7280
7281@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7282Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7283
7284@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7285Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7286
7287@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7288Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7289@end table
7290
7291@ifclear GENERIC
7292@lowersections
7293@end ifclear
7294@end ifset
7295
78058a5e
SL
7296@ifset NIOSII
7297@ifclear GENERIC
7298@raisesections
7299@end ifclear
7300
7301@node Nios II
7302@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7303@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7304@kindex --relax on Nios II
7305
7306Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7307transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7308which may result in @command{ld} giving
7309@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7310The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7311trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7312outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7313trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7314be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7315larger than 256MB.
7316
7317The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7318is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7319@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7320locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7321source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7322register as a temporary.
7323
7324Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7325relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7326option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7327
7328@ifclear GENERIC
7329@lowersections
7330@end ifclear
7331@end ifset
7332
2a60a7a8
AM
7333@ifset POWERPC
7334@ifclear GENERIC
7335@raisesections
7336@end ifclear
7337
7338@node PowerPC ELF32
7339@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7340@cindex PowerPC long branches
7341@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7342Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7343displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7344@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7345@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7346the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7347section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7348section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7349@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7350both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7351considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7352
7353@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7354@table @option
7355@cindex PowerPC PLT
7356@kindex --bss-plt
7357@item --bss-plt
7358Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7359generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7360the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7361writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7362@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7363PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7364compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7365BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7366
016687f8
AM
7367@kindex --secure-plt
7368@item --secure-plt
7369@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7370@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7371when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7372layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7373style BSS PLT.
7374
2a60a7a8
AM
7375@cindex PowerPC GOT
7376@kindex --sdata-got
7377@item --sdata-got
7378The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7379sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7380@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7381section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7382@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7383@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7384@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7385@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7386PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7387pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7388GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7389really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7390
7391@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7392@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7393@item --emit-stub-syms
7394This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7395symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7396
7397@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7398@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7399@item --no-tls-optimize
7400PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7401sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7402disable the optimization.
7403@end table
7404
7405@ifclear GENERIC
7406@lowersections
7407@end ifclear
7408@end ifset
7409
7410@ifset POWERPC64
7411@ifclear GENERIC
7412@raisesections
7413@end ifclear
7414
7415@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7416@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7417
7418@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7419@table @option
7420@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7421@kindex --stub-group-size
7422@item --stub-group-size
7423Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7424by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7425@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7426sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7427a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7428the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7429conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7430prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7431A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7432branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7433@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7434@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7435detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7436positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7437
7438Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7439single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7440create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7441large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7442
7443@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7444@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7445@item --emit-stub-syms
7446This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7447symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7448
7449@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7450@kindex --dotsyms
7451@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7452@item --dotsyms
7453@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7454These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7455in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7456function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7457code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7458properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7459to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7460@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7461dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7462feature.
7463
7ae4ea7d
AM
7464@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7465@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7466@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7467@item --save-restore-funcs
7468@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7469These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7470provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7471@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7472function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7473link.
7474
2a60a7a8
AM
7475@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7476@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7477@item --no-tls-optimize
7478PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7479sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7480disable the optimization.
7481
7c9cf415
AM
7482@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7483@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7484@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7485@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7486@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7487These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7488stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7489an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7490@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7491stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7492option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7493Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7494slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7495application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7496normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7497
2a60a7a8
AM
7498@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7499@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7500@item --no-opd-optimize
7501PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7502corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7503the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7504Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7505
7506@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7507@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7508@item --non-overlapping-opd
7509Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7510@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7511the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7512entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7513
7514@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7515@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7516@item --no-toc-optimize
7517PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7518entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7519reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7520marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7521marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7522relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7523unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7524reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7525discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7526reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7527code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7528optimization.
7529
7530@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7531@kindex --no-multi-toc
7532@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7533If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7534@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7535where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7536entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7537total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7538grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7539TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7540calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7541help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
754264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7543Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7544
7545@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7546@kindex --no-toc-sort
7547@item --no-toc-sort
7548By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7549happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7550placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7551with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7552referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7553@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7554results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7555off this feature.
7556
7557@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7558@kindex --plt-align
7559@kindex --no-plt-align
7560@item --plt-align
7561@itemx --no-plt-align
7562Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7563padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7564specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7565that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7566stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7567
7568@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7569@kindex --plt-static-chain
7570@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7571@item --plt-static-chain
7572@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7573Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7574chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7575chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7576
7577@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7578@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7579@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7580@item --plt-thread-safe
7581@itemx --no-thread-safe
7582With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7583lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7584another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7585order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7586memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7587barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7588looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7589seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7590default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7591@end table
7592
7593@ifclear GENERIC
7594@lowersections
7595@end ifclear
7596@end ifset
7597
49fa1e15
AM
7598@ifset SPU
7599@ifclear GENERIC
7600@raisesections
7601@end ifclear
7602
7603@node SPU ELF
7604@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7605
7606@cindex SPU ELF options
7607@table @option
7608
7609@cindex SPU plugins
7610@kindex --plugin
7611@item --plugin
7612This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7613
7614@cindex SPU overlays
7615@kindex --no-overlays
7616@item --no-overlays
7617Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7618regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7619@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7620turns off all this special overlay handling.
7621
7622@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7623@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7624@item --emit-stub-syms
7625This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7626symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7627
7628@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7629@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7630@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7631This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7632function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7633on calls to non-overlay regions.
7634
7635@cindex SPU local store size
7636@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7637@item --local-store=lo:hi
7638@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7639the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7640range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7641
c0065db7 7642@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7643@kindex --stack-analysis
7644@item --stack-analysis
7645SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7646unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7647under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7648@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7649@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7650determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7651for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7652for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7653for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7654find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7655and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7656under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7657dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7658is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7659and calls will be given.
7660
c0065db7 7661@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7662@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7663@item --emit-stack-syms
7664This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7665in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7666These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7667functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7668functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7669such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7670The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7671@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7672@end table
7673
7674@ifclear GENERIC
7675@lowersections
7676@end ifclear
7677@end ifset
7678
36f63dca
NC
7679@ifset TICOFF
7680@ifclear GENERIC
7681@raisesections
7682@end ifclear
7683
7684@node TI COFF
7685@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7686@cindex TI COFF versions
7687@kindex --format=@var{version}
7688The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7689TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7690also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7691format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7692header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7693
7694@ifclear GENERIC
7695@lowersections
7696@end ifclear
7697@end ifset
7698
2ca22b03
NC
7699@ifset WIN32
7700@ifclear GENERIC
7701@raisesections
7702@end ifclear
7703
7704@node WIN32
7705@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7706
c0065db7 7707This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7708See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7709command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7710
7711@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7712@cindex import libraries
7713@item import libraries
69da35b5 7714The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7715libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7716regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7717archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7718support for creating such libraries provided with the
7719@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7720
c0065db7
RM
7721@item exporting DLL symbols
7722@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7723The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7724
7725@table @emph
7726@item using auto-export functionality
7727@cindex using auto-export functionality
7728By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7729which is controlled by the following command line options:
7730
0a5d968e
NC
7731@itemize
7732@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7733@item --exclude-symbols
7734@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7735@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7736@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7737@end itemize
7738
09e2aba4
DK
7739When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7740(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7741symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7742often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7743private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7744options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7745exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7746final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7747
7748If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7749command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7750if either of the following are true:
7751
7752@itemize
7753@item A DEF file is used.
7754@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7755@end itemize
dc8465bf 7756
c0065db7
RM
7757@item using a DEF file
7758@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7759Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7760an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7761exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7762name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7763command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7764
7765@example
7766gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7767@end example
7768
0a5d968e
NC
7769Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7770@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7771
dc8465bf
NC
7772Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7773
7774@example
4b5bd4e7 7775LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7776
7777EXPORTS
7778foo
7779bar
7780_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7781another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7782var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7783doo = foo == foo2
7784eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7785@end example
dc8465bf 7786
7fcab871 7787This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7788symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7789alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7790by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7791@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7792@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7793export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7794in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7795symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7796
6b31ad16
DS
7797The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7798name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7799the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7800
b45619c0
NC
7801When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7802library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7803@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7804executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7805
7806With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7807specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7808non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7809
7810If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7811or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7812filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7813
4b5bd4e7
DS
7814The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7815
7816@example
7817EXPORTS
7818 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7819 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7820 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7821@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7822
7823Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7824@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7825@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7826@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7827Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7828@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7829string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7830
7831The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7832
7833@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7834will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7835by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7836linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7837library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7838
7839@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7840The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7841the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7842@code{*_imp__foo}).
7843
7844@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7845well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7846read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7847variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7848the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7849extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7850application will behave unexpectedly.
7851
7852@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7853it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7854symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7855API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7856the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7857
4b5bd4e7
DS
7858See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7859other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7860
7861@cindex creating a DEF file
7862While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7863with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7864
7865@item Using decorations
7866@cindex Using decorations
7867Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7868itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7869declared as:
7870
7871@example
7872__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7873__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7874@end example
7875
7876All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7877any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7878this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7879the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7880
7881Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7882decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7883instead:
7884
7885@example
7886__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7887__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7888@end example
7889
c0065db7
RM
7890This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7891when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7892variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7893code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7894of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7895omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7896@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7897information.
c0065db7 7898@end table
dc8465bf 7899
2ca22b03
NC
7900@cindex automatic data imports
7901@item automatic data imports
7902The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7903by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7904compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7905issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7906code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7907c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7908initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7909decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7910platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7911command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7912The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7913suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7914trigger the feature's use.
7915
c0065db7 7916auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7917additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7918
c0065db7 7919"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7920documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7921
c0065db7
RM
7922The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7923occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7924One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7925below.
7926
7927@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7928For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7929object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7930offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7931field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7932in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7933without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7934The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7935references.
7936
c0065db7
RM
7937The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7938be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7939themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7940runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7941compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7942support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7943run without error on an older system.
7944
c0065db7
RM
7945@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7946enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7947
7948@cindex direct linking to a dll
7949@item direct linking to a dll
7950The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7951including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7952libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7953traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7954libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7955function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7956though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7957storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7958tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7959large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7960
c0065db7 7961Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7962@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7963of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7964perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7965select the dll instead of an import library.
7966
2ca22b03 7967
69da35b5
NC
7968For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7969to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7970
7971@example
45e948fe
NC
7972libxxx.dll.a
7973xxx.dll.a
7974libxxx.a
7975xxx.lib
69da35b5 7976cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7977libxxx.dll
7978xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7979@end example
7980
69da35b5
NC
7981before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7982
c0065db7
RM
7983(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7984where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7985@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7986file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7987@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7988
c0065db7
RM
7989Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7990@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7991was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7992various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7993could coexist on the same machine.
7994
2ca22b03
NC
7995The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7996applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7997libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7998
7999@example
8000bin/
8001 cygxxx.dll
8002lib/
8003 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8004 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8005@end example
8006
c0065db7
RM
8007Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8008done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8009
80101. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8011@example
8012gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8013@end example
2ca22b03 8014
69da35b5
NC
8015However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8016(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8017@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8018not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8019
2ca22b03
NC
80202. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8021directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8022should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8023making the app/dll.
8024
8025@example
8026ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8027@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8028
8029Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8030
8031@example
8032gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8033@end example
69da35b5
NC
8034
8035This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8036perfectly legal
8037
8038@example
8039bin/
8040 cygxxx-5.dll
8041lib/
c0065db7 8042 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8043@end example
8044
dc8465bf 8045Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8046even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8047@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8048
8049Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8050wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8051
80521. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8053work with auto-imported data.
8054
dc8465bf
NC
80552. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8056import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8057symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8058for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8059possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8060
45e948fe
NC
80613. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8062critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8063in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8064stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8065
69da35b5 8066So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8067true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8068a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8069binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8070massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8071requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8072will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8073
c0065db7 8074@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8075@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8076@item adding additional names
8077Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8078A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8079exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8080when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8081import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8082
c0065db7 8083@example
dc8465bf
NC
8084LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8085
8086EXPORTS
c0065db7 8087foo
dc8465bf 8088_foo = foo
c0065db7 8089@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8090
8091The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8092
8093Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8094source code using the "weak" attribute:
8095
c0065db7
RM
8096@example
8097void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8098void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8099@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8100
8101See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8102symbols.
8103
8104@item renaming symbols
8105Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8106kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8107@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8108DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8109created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8110
c0065db7 8111@example
dc8465bf
NC
8112LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8113
8114EXPORTS
8115_foo = foo
c0065db7 8116@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8117
8118The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8119@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8120@end table
dc8465bf 8121
0a5d968e 8122Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8123unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8124If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8125@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8126that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8127@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8128renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8129to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8130the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8131In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8132which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8133
8134@cindex weak externals
8135@item weak externals
8136The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8137weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8138defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8139are three variants of weak externals:
8140@itemize
8141@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8142called lazy externals.
8143@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8144This form is not presently implemented.
8145@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8146implemented.
8147@end itemize
8148As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8149are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8150uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8151
8152@cindex aligned common symbols
8153@item aligned common symbols
8154As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8155desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8156the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8157carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8158by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8159tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8160but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8161warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8162
2ca22b03
NC
8163@end table
8164
8165@ifclear GENERIC
8166@lowersections
8167@end ifclear
8168@end ifset
8169
e0001a05
NC
8170@ifset XTENSA
8171@ifclear GENERIC
8172@raisesections
8173@end ifclear
8174
8175@node Xtensa
8176@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8177
8178@cindex Xtensa processors
8179The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8180@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8181specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8182keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8183example, with the command:
8184
8185@smallexample
8186SECTIONS
8187@{
8188 .text : @{
8189 *(.literal .text)
8190 @}
8191@}
8192@end smallexample
8193
8194@noindent
8195@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8196and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8197literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8198interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8199group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8200files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8201and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8202
43cd72b9 8203@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8204@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8205Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8206provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8207is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8208literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8209will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8210location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8211the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8212unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8213@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8214range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8215
8216For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8217to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8218instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8219instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8220instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8221@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8222hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8223By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8224switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8225density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8226instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8227performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8228linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8229a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8230
8231The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8232control the linker:
8233
8234@cindex Xtensa options
8235@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8236@item --size-opt
8237When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8238more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8239no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8240alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8241preserve the correctness of the code.
8242@end table
e0001a05
NC
8243
8244@ifclear GENERIC
8245@lowersections
8246@end ifclear
8247@end ifset
8248
252b5132
RH
8249@ifclear SingleFormat
8250@node BFD
8251@chapter BFD
8252
8253@cindex back end
8254@cindex object file management
8255@cindex object formats available
8256@kindex objdump -i
8257The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8258These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8259object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8260format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8261it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8262associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8263object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8264(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8265list all the formats available for your configuration.
8266
8267@cindex BFD requirements
8268@cindex requirements for BFD
8269As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8270several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8271BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8272formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8273been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8274BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8275may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8276
8277One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8278mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8279useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8280conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8281
8282@menu
8283* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8284@end menu
8285
8286@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8287@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8288@cindex opening object files
8289@include bfdsumm.texi
8290@end ifclear
8291
8292@node Reporting Bugs
8293@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8294@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8295@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8296
ff5dcc92 8297Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8298
8299Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8300it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8301to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8302work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8303@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8304
8305In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8306information that enables us to fix the bug.
8307
8308@menu
8309* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8310* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8311@end menu
8312
8313@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8314@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8315@cindex bug criteria
8316
8317If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8318
8319@itemize @bullet
8320@cindex fatal signal
8321@cindex linker crash
8322@cindex crash of linker
8323@item
8324If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8325@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8326
8327@cindex error on valid input
8328@item
ff5dcc92 8329If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8330
8331@cindex invalid input
8332@item
ff5dcc92 8333If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8334may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8335object files are correct.
8336
8337@item
8338If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8339improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8340@end itemize
8341
8342@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8343@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8344@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8345@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8346
8347A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8348products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8349recommend you contact that organization first.
8350
8351You can find contact information for many support companies and
8352individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8353distribution.
8354
ad22bfe8 8355@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8356Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8357@value{BUGURL}.
8358@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8359
8360The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8361@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8362fact or leave it out, state it!
8363
8364Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8365problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8366assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8367matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8368the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8369location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8370were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8371into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8372specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8373and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8374
8375Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8376the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8377on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8378
8379Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8380bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8381respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8382You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8383
8384To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8385
8386@itemize @bullet
8387@item
ff5dcc92 8388The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8389the @samp{--version} argument.
8390
8391Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8392the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8393
8394@item
ff5dcc92 8395Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8396patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8397
8398@item
8399The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8400version number.
8401
8402@item
ff5dcc92 8403What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8404``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8405
8406@item
8407The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8408observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8409list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8410sufficient.
8411
8412If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8413and then we might not encounter the bug.
8414
8415@item
8416A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8417bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8418provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8419bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8420state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8421requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8422we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8423attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8424
8425If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8426@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8427object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8428@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8429how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8430
8431@item
8432A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8433incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8434
ff5dcc92 8435Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8436will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8437not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8438a chance to make a mistake.
8439
8440Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8441say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8442copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8443C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8444and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8445fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8446you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8447any conclusion from our observations.
8448
8449@item
ff5dcc92 8450If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8451diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8452@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8453If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8454context, not by line number.
8455
8456The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8457sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8458@end itemize
8459
8460Here are some things that are not necessary:
8461
8462@itemize @bullet
8463@item
8464A description of the envelope of the bug.
8465
8466Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8467which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8468changes will not affect it.
8469
8470This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8471will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8472with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8473We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8474
8475Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8476of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8477output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8478less time, and so on.
8479
8480However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8481report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8482
8483@item
8484A patch for the bug.
8485
8486A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8487the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8488a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8489to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8490
ff5dcc92 8491Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8492construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8493through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8494able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8495fixed.
8496
8497And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8498patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8499help us to understand.
8500
8501@item
8502A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8503
8504Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8505things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8506@end itemize
8507
8508@node MRI
8509@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8510@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8511To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8512linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8513alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8514described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8515simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8516@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8517linker commands; these commands are described here.
8518
8519In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8520file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8521features to make use of them.
8522
8523You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8524@samp{-c} command-line option.
8525
8526Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8527command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8528blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8529MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8530issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8531
8532Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8533
8534You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8535lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8536The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8537
8538@table @code
8539@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8540@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8541@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8542Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8543the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8544@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8545your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8546script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8547commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8548input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8549@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8550
8551@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8552@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8553Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8554in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8555
8556@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8557
8558@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8559@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8560Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8561@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8562
8563@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8564@item BASE @var{expression}
8565Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8566absolute addresses) in the output file.
8567
8568@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8569@item CHIP @var{expression}
8570@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8571This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8572
8573@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8574@item END
8575This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8576
8577@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8578@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8579Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8580language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8581
8582@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8583@item
252b5132
RH
8584S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8585
8586@item
8587IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8588
8589@item
8590COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8591@samp{COFF}
8592@end enumerate
8593
8594@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8595@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8596Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8597@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8598
8599The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8600same line, with no change in its effect.
8601
8602@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8603@item LOAD @var{filename}
8604@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8605Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8606same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8607command line.
8608
8609@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8610@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8611@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8612MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8613option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8614
8615@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8616@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8617@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8618Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8619order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8620script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8621sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8622file, in the order specified.
8623
8624@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8625@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8626@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8627@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8628Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8629@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8630
8631@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8632@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8633@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8634@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8635You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8636specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8637If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8638@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8639@end table
8640
793c5807
NC
8641@node GNU Free Documentation License
8642@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8643@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8644
370b66a1
CD
8645@node LD Index
8646@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8647
8648@printindex cp
8649
8650@tex
7ca01ed9 8651% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8652% meantime:
8653\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8654\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8655\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8656\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8657\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8658\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8659\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8660\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8661\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8662% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8663@end tex
8664
252b5132 8665@bye